EUR ViridianWS Service (AM-0206-04)

VIRIDIAN WS™
Eurasia
RoHS Compliant
Electronic Gaming Machine
Service Manual
AM-0206-04
Preface Service Manual
© Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 2011
Copyright in this manual is owned by Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd and is protected by Australian and
International intellectual property laws.
Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd only permits use and other actions in relation to this manual by a person who:
a. is an authorised licensee of Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd;
b. is licensed by each relevant gaming authority to possess equipment to which this manual relates; and
c. at the time of the use or action, is legitimately in possession of the Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty
Ltd equipment to which this manual relates.
Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd does not permit use or other actions in relation to this manual by any other
person. If you have not obtained a licence from Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd to use this manual or the
equipment to which it relates, you should contact your local Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd office to secure
such licence.
To the extent permitted by law Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd prohibits any copying, alteration, modification,
decompilation, or other tampering, adaptation, translation, sale, lease or other commercial exploitation of this
manual or any part of it, or any removal, defacement or replacement of any registered trademarks of Aristocrat
Technologies Pty Ltd which may appear in this manual, software or on the machinery in which it is embodied.
In particular, to the extent permitted by law, Aristocrat Technologies Pty Ltd prohibits any distribution of this
manual to, or access to this manual by, any person other than your employees and/or contractors who are
bona fide engaged in the operation of the equipment to which this manual relates.
Trademarks
Aristocrat and Aristocrat game names and Aristocrat products mentioned in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd.
WARNING:
 This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate action.
 The equipment described in this manual is certified and classified for indoor use only.
CAUTION:
All functions of the machine are controlled by complex electronics. Unqualified personnel must
not interfere with any mechanisms or controls as this may permanently damage the machine and
lead to expensive repairs or component replacement, and will render the warranty void.
NOTE:
Procedures outlined in the Installation Chapter of the Service Manual and throughout this manual
ensure compliance with the standards AS60950, EN60950 and UL22. These Standards define
the stability requirements for equipment in normal operation and service mode.
ii
Service Manual Preface
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, Cautions and Notes appear throughout this manual. They are designated as shown below:
WARNING:
Indicates an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly followed, could
result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION:
Indicates an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not strictly observed, could
result in damage to or destruction of the equipment, or corruption of the data.
NOTE:
Indicates an operating procedure, maintenance practice or condition which requires highlighting.
Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

This EGM complies with Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
(RoHS) in electrical and electronic equipment. All components for repair or upgrade of this EGM must be
ROHS compliant.
When ordering new components for this EGM, it is the responsibility of the venue to specify that the
components are for a RoHS compliant EGM.
Important Safety Information

This document contains important information about the use of the equipment and hazards involved in owning
and operating the equipment to which it relates. The equipment can be very hazardous if used other than in
accordance with this document.
Inform Yourself and Your Staff

You must read this document before using the equipment or opening any part of the equipment. Ensure your
staff do too.
The equipment itself is marked with important warning labels detailing dangers.
 Check for warning labels whenever opening any part of the equipment.
 Read and comply with all warning labels you see when operating or opening the equipment.
 Under no circumstances remove or alter any warning label.
Be Careful
If you do not follow the directions in this manual and on warning labels you increase the risk of the following
things occurring:
 Serious personal injury, including electrocution and amputation. Unless you are a trained technician,
tampering with the EGM can kill you.
 Serious damage to the equipment.
 Serious damage to other equipment.
 Serious damage to the premises housing the equipment.
 Rendering the warranty void.
iii
Manuals and Part Catalogues

Operator Manual
The operator manual is mainly aimed at club staff, particularly floor personnel.
The Operator Manual:
 Gives a general overview of the hardware and software.

 Provides procedures for day to day operations and general maintenance.
Service Manual
The service manual is mainly aimed at technicians. It covers areas of machine servicing and maintenance that
must be carried out by licensed technicians.
The Service Manual:
 Gives a general overview of the hardware and software.

 Provides instructions for installation and fault finding.
 Describes in detail each of the major components of the EGM.
Parts Catalogue
The parts catalogue is aimed at operators and service technicians.
The Parts Catalogue:
 Shows illustrations of each of the components of the EGM.

 Links each illustration with part numbers.
iv
Service Manual Preface
Record of Amendments
Rev. Date Description By
01 Feb 2011 Original issue for submission. AU TechDocs
02 Jul 2011 Original issue. AU TechDocs
03 Jul 2011 General updates. AU TechDocs
04 Oct 2011 Periodic update. AU TechDocs
v
Brief History of Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd

Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd, established in 1953, is one of the oldest and most successful
gaming machine manufacturers. Aristocrat has supplied machines to every country and region in the world
where gaming machines are legal, including Austria, France, Germany, Holland, Malaysia, New Zealand, the
Philippines, Africa, Singapore, Russia, South America, and the USA.
vi
Service Manual Contents
Table of Contents
General Description....................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Physical Description ................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Functional Description ............................................................................ 1-9
1.3 Specifications......................................................................................... 1-10
Installation ...................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 2-8

2.2.1 Mounting ................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up .................................................... 2-10
2.2.3 Configuring the EGM ............................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.4 Commissioning the EGM ..................................................................................... 2-12
Machine Modes .............................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Modes of Operation ................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Play Mode ................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.1 Player Operation .................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.2 Main LCD Screen ................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes ................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.4 Playbuttons ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.5 EGM Self-Test ........................................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.6 Security .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.7 Light Tower........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.8 Electromechanical Meters .................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.9 Electronic Meters.................................................................................................. 3-14
3.2.10 Start, Reset and Restart Procedure ..................................................................... 3-15
vii
Contents Service Manual
3.3 Operator Mode Menu .............................................................................3-24

3.3.1 Machine Identification........................................................................................... 3-27
3.3.2 Accounting Information......................................................................................... 3-28
3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu ............................................................................... 3-38
3.3.4 Test/Diagnostics Mode ......................................................................................... 3-49
3.3.5 Operator Setup/Selections Menu ......................................................................... 3-60
3.3.6 Miscellaneous Menu............................................................................................. 3-67
3.3.7 Current Active Lockups ........................................................................................ 3-77
3.4 Operator Mode Menu – Worldbase .......................................................3-78

3.4.1 Machine Identification........................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.2 Operator Setup/Selections ................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.3 Accounting Information....................................................................................... 3-101
3.4.4 Diagnostics Information ...................................................................................... 3-120
3.4.5 Test/Diagnostics Mode ....................................................................................... 3-134
3.4.6 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................... 3-147
3.4.7 Current Lockup ................................................................................................... 3-157
Cabinet ............................................................................................ 4-1

4.1 General Description .................................................................................4-4
4.2 Cabinet and Doors ...................................................................................4-5

4.2.1 Lower Main Door .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 Upper Main Door .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Belly Door ............................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Hinges .................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.5 Door Latches and Keys ........................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.6 Key Switches ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.7 Cabinet Security ................................................................................................... 4-15
viii
4.2.8 Logic Cage ........................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.9 Coin Chute Module (if fitted) ................................................................................ 4-18
4.2.10 Mid Trim ............................................................................................................... 4-19
4.2.11 Pay Panel ............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.2.12 Coin Tray (if fitted) ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.2.13 Cashbox and Chute ............................................................................................. 4-24
4.2.14 Main LCD Screen ................................................................................................. 4-24
4.3 Player Marketing Module (PMM) (if fitted) ............................................ 4-25

4.3.1 General Description ............................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.2 Technical Description ........................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.3 Machine Communications Setup ......................................................................... 4-27
4.3.4 Removal and Replacement Procedure ................................................................ 4-28
4.4 Electromechanical Meters (if fitted) ..................................................... 4-29
4.5 Topbox .................................................................................................... 4-30

4.5.1 Topbox Door......................................................................................................... 4-30
4.5.2 Casino Topbox and LCD Screen ......................................................................... 4-31
4.5.3 Chop Topbox, Lighting and Artwork (if fitted)....................................................... 4-33
4.6 Topper (if fitted) ..................................................................................... 4-34

4.6.1 Topper Components ............................................................................................ 4-34
4.6.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.7 Wing Lighting ......................................................................................... 4-36
4.8 Light Tower (if fitted) ............................................................................. 4-37

4.8.1 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure ............................................................... 4-38
4.9 Audio System ....................................................................................................... 4-39
4.9.1 Audio Setup .......................................................................................................... 4-39
ix
4.9.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures .............................................................. 4-40
4.10 Bank Note Acceptor Cage (if fitted) ......................................................4-41

4.10.1 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 4-41
4.11 Maintenance ...........................................................................................4-43
Power Supply .................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Technical Description ..............................................................................5-4

5.2.1 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Input Functional Specifications .............................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3 Output Functional Specifications ............................................................................ 5-8
5.2.4 Connectors ........................................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.5 Operating and Storage Environment.................................................................... 5-15
5.3 Maintenance ...........................................................................................5-16

5.3.1 Fuses .................................................................................................................... 5-16
Coin Handling Assembly ............................................................... 6-1

6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................6-3
6.2 Coin Validators .........................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Condor Coin Validator (if fitted) .............................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator (if fitted) .................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor............................................6-6
6.4 Maintenance .............................................................................................6-6

6.4.1 Coin Validator ......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.2 Coin Chute Assembly ............................................................................................. 6-7
6.4.3 Diverter Solenoid .................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.4 Photo-optic Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-7
x
Hopper ............................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper ......................................................... 7-4

7.2.1 Motor Control.......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Coin Counting......................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Electrical Connection and Interface ....................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 7-8

7.3.1 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................................................ 7-8
7.3.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 7-9
Bank Note Acceptor ...................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 JCM UBA Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Physical Description ............................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3 MEI Cashflow Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ....................................... 8-11
8.3.1 Physical Description ............................................................................................. 8-11
8.3.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4 CashCode Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ............................................. 8-14

8.4.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 8-18
8.5 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 8-19

8.5.2 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 8-19
Ticket Printer .................................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2 FutureLogic Printer (if fitted) .................................................................. 9-3
xi
9.2.1 General Description................................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Ticket Handling ....................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Removal and Replacement Procedure .................................................................. 9-6
9.3 TransAct Epic 950 Printer (if fitted) ........................................................9-7

9.3.1 General Description................................................................................................ 9-7
9.3.2 Ticket Handling ....................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.3 Sensors ................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.3.4 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.6 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer (if fitted) ....................................................9-14

9.4.1 General Description.............................................................................................. 9-14
9.4.2 Ticket Handling ..................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.3 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 9-16
9.4.5 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 9-18
9.5 Maintenance ...........................................................................................9-19

9.5.1 Checking the Printer Function .............................................................................. 9-19
9.5.2 Removing Excess Dust ........................................................................................ 9-19
9.5.3 Cleaning the Print Head ....................................................................................... 9-19
LCD Screens ................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Overview .................................................................................................10-3
10.2 LCD Screen .............................................................................................10-3

10.2.1 General Description.............................................................................................. 10-3
10.3 Feature Topbox LCD Screen .................................................................10-6
xii
10.3.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 On-Screen Display (OSD) ...................................................................... 10-8
10.5 Touch Screen ......................................................................................... 10-9

10.5.1 Specifications ....................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 10-10
10.5.3 Touch Screen Calibration................................................................................... 10-11
10.5.4 Handling the Touch Screen................................................................................ 10-11
10.6 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 10-11
Main Logic Assembly .................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.2 Functional Description.......................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Carrier Board Assembly ........................................................................ 11-4

11.2.1 COM Express Module .......................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.2 Carrier Board ........................................................................................................ 11-6
11.2.3 Mass Storage Device ......................................................................................... 11-12
11.2.4 Smart Card ......................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.5 Video Graphics ................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.6 Connectors ......................................................................................................... 11-14
11.3 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 11-16
Backplane Board ......................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 12-3
xiii
12.2 Backplane Board ....................................................................................12-5

12.2.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Maintenance ...........................................................................................12-9

Electromechanical Meter Board .................................................. 13-1

13.1 Overview .................................................................................................13-3
13.2 Electromechanical Meter Board............................................................13-5

13.2.1 Overcurrent Protection ......................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.2 Security Interface ................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.3 Meter Detection .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.4 Connector ............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.3 Maintenance ...........................................................................................13-6

Standalone Jackpots ................................................................... 14-1

14.1 Overview .................................................................................................14-3
14.2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................14-3
Hyperlink™ and Mystery Jackpots ............................................. 15-1

15.1 Overview .................................................................................................15-3
15.1.1 Hyperlink Jackpots ............................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.2 Mystery Jackpots .................................................................................................. 15-3
15.2 Block Diagrams ......................................................................................15-4
Communications Interface Board ............................................... 16-1

16.1 Overview .................................................................................................16-3
16.2 Communications Interface Board .........................................................16-3
16.3 Maintenance ...........................................................................................16-4

xiv
Serial Protocol Converter ........................................................... 17-1

17.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 17-3
17.2 SPC2 Converter Kit (if fitted) ................................................................ 17-3

17.2.1 SPC2 Board ......................................................................................................... 17-4
17.2.2 DC Converter Board ............................................................................................. 17-9
17.3 SPC2.5 Converter Kit (if fitted) ........................................................... 17-10

17.3.1 SPC2.5 Board .................................................................................................... 17-10
17.4 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 17-14

17.4.1 Removal and Replacement Procedure .............................................................. 17-14
Machine Fault Finding ................................................................. 18-1

18.1 Machine Alerts ....................................................................................... 18-3
18.2 Message Displays and Conditions ....................................................... 18-4

18.2.1 Cabinet ................................................................................................................. 18-4
18.2.2 Power ................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.2.3 Coin Handling (if fitted) ......................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.4 Hopper (if fitted).................................................................................................... 18-9
18.2.5 Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ............................................................................. 18-10
18.2.6 Printer (if fitted) ................................................................................................... 18-11
18.2.7 LCD Screens ...................................................................................................... 18-12
18.2.8 Electronic Meters................................................................................................ 18-13
18.3 Reset Messages ................................................................................... 18-14
Glossary ........................................................................................ G-1
Index ................................................................................................ I-1
xv
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical EGM ...................................................................................................................... 1-4

Figure 1-2 Internal View of Typical EGM ............................................................................................. 1-5
Figure 1-3 Internal View of Typical EGM Doors .................................................................................. 1-6
Figure 1-4 Casino Topbox and Topper ................................................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-5 Typical EGM Functional Diagram....................................................................................... 1-9
Figure 2-1 Front and Side View - Chop Topbox Dimensions ............................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-2 Front and Side View - Casino Topbox Dimensions ............................................................ 2-5
Figure 2-3 Footprint ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Figure 2-4 Clearances ......................................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-5 In-line Fixing ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-6 Fixing Back-to-Back ........................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-7 Fixing Isolated .................................................................................................................. 2-10
Figure 3-1 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ................................................................................. 3-5
Figure 3-2 Format of Game Display .................................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-3 Location of CompactFlash and Smart Card in Logic Cage............................................... 3-15
Figure 4-1 Belly Door and Artwork....................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-2 Belly Door Flasher.............................................................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-3 Hinge Module ................................................................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-4 Upper and Lower Main Door Latching .............................................................................. 4-12
Figure 4-5 Key Switches Removal and Replacement ........................................................................ 4-14
Figure 4-6 Abloy Keyway and Quick Change Core ........................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-7 Logic Cage ....................................................................................................................... 4-16

Figure 4-8 Coin Chuting Assembly and Coin Paths........................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-9 Mid Trim and Playbuttons ................................................................................................ 4-19
Figure 4-10 Playbutton - Exploded View ........................................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-11 Coin Tray ....................................................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-12 Player Marketing Module................................................................................................ 4-25
Figure 4-13 Variation to Face of PMM (Initial Display Message) ....................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-14 Electromechanical Meters .............................................................................................. 4-29
Figure 4-15 Casino Topbox and Topper ............................................................................................ 4-31
Figure 4-16 Chop Topbox.................................................................................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-17 Oval Topper Components .............................................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-18 Cabinet Lighting ............................................................................................................. 4-36
Figure 4-19 Light Tower .................................................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-20 Standard Speakers, Woofer and Large Amplifier ........................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-21 Cage Housing and BNA Access..................................................................................... 4-42
xvi
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Unit - Front...................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Unit - Back ...................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Unit - Block Diagram ....................................................................................5-6
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Validator ........................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator ...............................................................................................6-5
Figure 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper .....................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper - Rear View ..................................................................7-5
Figure 8-1 JCM UBA BNA ...................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 6-2 JCM UBA Bill Acceptor with Lid Open and with Bill Drop Box Withdrawn...........................8-5
Figure 6-3 JCM UBA Bill Acceptor Assembly Components .................................................................8-5
Figure 8-2 JCM BNA Input/Output Connector......................................................................................8-8
Figure 8-3 MEI Cashflow BNA ...........................................................................................................8-11
Figure 8-4 MEI Cashflow BNA 12 Pin Chassis Docking Station Connector .......................................8-13
Figure 8-5 CashCode BNA ................................................................................................................8-15
Figure 8-6 CashCode 24 pin Connector ............................................................................................8-17
Figure 9-1 FutureLogic Printer ..............................................................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 FutureLogic Interface Cable Port Pin Locations ..................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Loading Tickets into the FutureLogic Printer .......................................................................9-5
Figure 9-4 FutureLogic Printer Removal ...............................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-5 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer .........................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-6 Loading Tickets into the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer ..................................................9-9
Figure 9-7 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Sensor Locations...........................................................9-10
Figure 9-8 Sample Test Ticket ............................................................................................................9-12

Figure 9-9 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer ......................................................................................9-14
Figure 9-10 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Drawer Fully Open .....................................................9-15
Figure 9-11 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Ticket Stack ...............................................................9-15
Figure 9-12 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Feeding the Ticket .....................................................9-16
Figure 9-13 Removing the Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer .............................................................9-17
Figure 9-14 Self-Test Ticket ...............................................................................................................9-18
Figure 10-1 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor .........................................................................................10-10
Figure 11-1 Logic Cage and Location of Carrier Board......................................................................11-3
Figure 11-2 Carrier Board Layout - Issue B ........................................................................................11-6
Figure 11-3 Carrier Board Block Diagram - Issue B ............................................................................11-7
Figure 12-1 Backplane Board Location ..............................................................................................12-3
Figure 12-2 Backplane Board Component Locations.........................................................................12-5
Figure 13-1 Electromechanical Meter Board......................................................................................13-4
Figure 14-1 Standalone Jackpots Block Diagram ..............................................................................14-3
xvii
Figure 15-1 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted).................................................. 15-4
Figure 15-2 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted)............................................... 15-5
Figure 15-3 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (if fitted) .......................................................... 15-6
Figure 15-4 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted) ............................................... 15-7
Figure 15-5 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted) ................................................ 15-8
Figure 15-6 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - ASP (if fitted) .............................................................. 15-9
Figure 15-7 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted) ............................................. 15-10
Figure 15-8 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted) ........... 15-11
Figure 15-9 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted) ........ 15-12
Figure 15-10 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (if fitted) .................. 15-13
Figure 15-11 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted) ....... 15-14
Figure 15-12 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted)........ 15-15
Figure 15-13 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - ASP (if fitted) ...................... 15-16
Figure 15-14 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted) ....... 15-17
Figure 15-15 Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Worldbase (if fitted) ................................... 15-18
Figure 16-1 Communications Interface Board - Component Layout .................................................. 16-3
Figure 16-2 Communications Interface Board - Mounting ................................................................. 16-4
Figure 17-1 SPC2 Kit with SPC2 Board and DC Converter Board .................................................... 17-3
Figure 17-2 SPC2 Board ................................................................................................................... 17-4
Figure 17-3 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2 ...................................................................................... 17-5
Figure 17-4 EGM with SPC2 ............................................................................................................. 17-6
Figure 17-5 DC Converter Board Detail............................................................................................. 17-9
Figure 17-6 SPC2.5 Board .............................................................................................................. 17-10

Figure 17-7 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2.5 Protocol Converter ................................................... 17-12
Figure 17-8 EGM with SPC2.5 Protocol Converter ......................................................................... 17-13
xviii
List of Tables
Table 1-1 EGM Modules ......................................................................................................................1-3

Table 1-2 EGM Key Types ..................................................................................................................1-8
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics .....................................................................................................1-10
Table 1-4 Supply Voltage Requirements ...........................................................................................1-10
Table 1-5 Power Requirements with Dual LCD Screen Configuration ...............................................1-10
Table 1-6 Auxiliary Power ..................................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-7 Environment ......................................................................................................................1-11
Table 3-1 Door Security Functions .....................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-2 Two-Tier Light Tower ..........................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-3 Three-Tier Light Tower .......................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-4 Four Tier Light Tower .........................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Overview ........................................................................3-25
Table 3-6 Log Sizes ...........................................................................................................................3-38
Table 3-7 Details of Tests ..................................................................................................................3-53
Table 3-9 Log Sizes .........................................................................................................................3-120
Table 3-10 Details of Tests ..............................................................................................................3-137
Table 4-1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader Characteristics ....................................................................4-26
Table 4-2 Liquid Crystal Display Characteristics ................................................................................4-27
Table 5-1 Specification Summary ........................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 DC Outputs ..........................................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-1 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................................5-6

Table 5-2 AC Input Line Requirements ................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 AC Outputs ..........................................................................................................................5-8
Table 5-4 DC Output Voltage Regulation ............................................................................................5-8
Table 5-5 DC Output Currents .............................................................................................................5-9
Table 5-6 DC Output Transient Step Sizes ..........................................................................................5-9
Table 5-7 DC Output Ripple and Noise .............................................................................................5-10
Table 5-8 Output Capacitive Loads ...................................................................................................5-10
Table 5-9 PWR_FAILn Voltage Levels ..............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-10 PS_ONn Signal Characteristics .......................................................................................5-11
Table 5-11 24VF_OFFn Voltage Levels ............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-12 Power Supply Timing .......................................................................................................5-12
Table 5-13 DC Output Over Voltage Limits .......................................................................................5-13
Table 5-14 Overload Limits ................................................................................................................5-13
Table 5-15 AC Connectors ................................................................................................................5-14
xix
Table 5-16 DC Outputs Connector Pin Assignment .......................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-17 Operating Environment ................................................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-18 Storage Environment....................................................................................................... 5-15
Table 6-1 Recommended Power Supply ............................................................................................. 6-6
Table 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper Motor Control ............................................................... 7-6
Table 7-2 Electrical Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 8-1 LED Error Codes ............................................................................................................... 8-10
Table 8-2 MEI Cashflow BNA Operating Conditions ......................................................................... 8-12
Table 8-3 CashCode BNA Operating Conditions .............................................................................. 8-16
Table 9-1 FutureLogic Printer Specifications ........................................................................................ 9-4
Table 9-2 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Specifications ................................................................... 9-8
Table 9-3 Sensor Functions of the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer ................................................. 9-11
Table 9-4 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Status LEDs ................................................................... 9-13
Table 10-1 LCD Specifications (typical)............................................................................................. 10-4
Table 10-2 Sync Input Signal Characteristics .................................................................................... 10-4
Table 10-3 Picture Display Initiate Settings ....................................................................................... 10-5
Table 10-6 OSD Key Functions ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Table 10-7 Touch Screen Specifications ........................................................................................... 10-9
Table 11-1 COM Express Module ..................................................................................................... 11-5
Table 11-2 Ethernet LED Functions .................................................................................................. 11-8
Table 11-3 UART Allocation .............................................................................................................. 11-8

Table 11-4 SPI Channel Allocation .................................................................................................. 11-10
Table 11-5 POST Code Display ...................................................................................................... 11-11
Table 11-6 Description of LEDs....................................................................................................... 11-11
Table 11-7 Description of Connectors ............................................................................................. 11-14
Table 12-1 Backplane Connection Function and Type ...................................................................... 12-6
Table 13-1 Meter Specifications ........................................................................................................ 13-3
Table 17-1 SPC2 LED Operation ...................................................................................................... 17-4
Table 17-2 SPC2 Board Connectors ................................................................................................. 17-7
Table 17-3 DC Converter Board Microfit Connectors ........................................................................ 17-9
Table 17-4 SPC2.5 LED Operation ................................................................................................. 17-11
Table 17-5 SPC2.5 Board Connectors and Pinouts ........................................................................ 17-13
Table 18-1 Fault Finding - Lamps and LEDs ..................................................................................... 18-4
Table 18-2 Fault Finding - Feature Topbox Lighting .......................................................................... 18-5
Table 18-3 Fault Finding – Sound ..................................................................................................... 18-6
xx
Table 18-4 Fault Finding - Power .......................................................................................................18-7
Table 18-5 Fault Finding - Coin Handling ..........................................................................................18-8
Table 18-6 Fault Finding - Hopper .....................................................................................................18-9
Table 18-7 Fault Finding - Bank Note Acceptor ...............................................................................18-10
Table 18-8 Fault Finding – Printer ...................................................................................................18-11
Table 18-9 Fault Finding - Main LCD Screen...................................................................................18-12
Table 18-10 Fault Finding - Topbox LCD Screen ............................................................................18-13
Table 18-11 Fault Finding - Electronic Audit Meters ........................................................................18-13
Table 18-12 Fault Finding - Messages ............................................................................................18-14
xxi
Notes
xxii
Service Manual General Description
Chapter 1
General Description
1.1 Physical Description ................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Functional Description ............................................................................ 1-9
1.3 Specifications......................................................................................... 1-10
1-1
General Description Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical EGM ...................................................................................................................... 1-4

Figure 1-2 Internal View of Typical EGM ............................................................................................. 1-5
Figure 1-3 Internal View of Typical EGM Doors .................................................................................. 1-6
Figure 1-4 Casino Topbox and Topper ................................................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-5 Typical EGM Functional Diagram....................................................................................... 1-9
List of Tables
Table 1-1 EGM Modules ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2 EGM Key Types .................................................................................................................. 1-8
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1-10
Table 1-4 Supply Voltage Requirements ........................................................................................... 1-10
Table 1-5 Power Requirements with Dual LCD Screen Configuration ............................................... 1-10
Table 1-6 Auxiliary Power .................................................................................................................. 1-11
Table 1-7 Environment ...................................................................................................................... 1-11
1-2
1.1 Physical Description

The Aristocrat™ electronic gaming machines (EGMs) are assembled from various modules. The
following table identifies and describes the various EGM modules.
Table 1-1 EGM Modules
EGM Module Description

Cabinet The cabinet is the outer enclosure that houses all the components.
LCD screen The main LCD screen is the primary display for game operation
and status.
The topbox may be fitted with an additional LCD to provide
additional game and jackpot display.
Touch screen (if fitted) The touch screen allows game play by touching the screen.
Carrier board The carrier board interfaces with the EGM components, and it
houses the central processor and other logic components.
Backplane board The backplane board connects the carrier board to the EGM
components.
Logic cage The logic cage is a secure enclosure that houses the carrier board
assembly. The section of the backplane board that interfaces with
the carrier board is located at the back of logic cage.
Power supply unit The power supply unit converts AC mains input voltage into low
(PSU) voltage DC power directed to the EGM components via the
backplane board.
Coin handling system The coin handling system validates inserted coins or tokens, and
(if fitted) directs coins to the hopper, cashbox or coin tray.
Hopper (if fitted) The hopper holds and dispenses coins.
Bank note acceptor The bank note acceptor validates inserted notes and tickets.
(BNA) (if fitted) Validated bank notes and tickets are stored in the note stacker.
Player marketing The player marketing module direct provides an interface to a
module (PMM) (if venue network system that records player transactions and sends
fitted) messages to individual players.
Electromechanical Electromechanical meters are used to record accounting data in a
meters (if fitted) physical format.
Ticket printer (if fitted) The ticket printer provides players with redeemable tickets.
Communications The communications interface links the EGM to networks and
interface (if fitted) other equipment.
Topbox (if fitted) The topbox houses an additional LCD screen.
Light tower (if fitted) The light tower provides additional customer service and security.
1-3
Figure 1-1 Typical EGM
11
10 12
13
9
14
8
7 15
6 16
5
17
4
18
3
19
1
2
20
1
VIWSC
AB _018
22 21
Legend
1 Lower Main Door 9 Player Marketing Module 17 Bank Note Entry
(PMM) (if fitted) (if fitted)
2 Belly Door/Artwork 10 Topbox LCD Screen 18 Belly Door Lock
3 Mid Trim 11 Speakers 19 Electromechanical
Meters (if fitted)
4 Playbuttons 12 Topbox Door 20 Lower Main Door Lock
5 Ticket Exit 13 Cabinet 21 Woofer
(if fitted)
6 Pay Panel 14 Upper Main Door 22 Coin Tray (if fitted)
7 Coin Entry (if fitted) 15 Reset Key Switch
8 Main LCD Screen 16 Meter/Audit Key Switch
1-4
Figure 1-2 Internal View of Typical EGM
8
4
9
10
11
3
12
13
2
14
15
1 16
VIWSCAB_019
Legend
1 Hopper (if fitted) 7 Upper Main Door 13 Lower Main Door
Catch Catch
2 On/Off Switch 8 Reset Key Switch 14 Lower Main Door
Lock
3 Ticket Printer 9 Meter/Audit Key 15 Bank Note Acceptor
(if fitted) Switch Cage Lock
4 Logic Cage 10 Electromechanical 16 Woofer
Meters (if fitted)
5 Speakers (2 off) 11 Bank Note Acceptor
(if fitted)
6 Topbox LCD Screen 12 Bank Note Stacker
1-5
Figure 1-3 Internal View of Typical EGM Doors
1
VIWSCAB_021
Legend
1 Lower Main Door 4 Lower Main Door 7 Upper Main Door
Latch and Optics Latch
Light Pipe
2 Coin Chuting (if fitted) 5 Playbutton Switches 8 Upper Main Door
3 Coin Validator 6 Main LCD Screen
(if fitted)
1-6
Figure 1-4 Casino Topbox and Topper
6 VIWSCAB_007
Legend
1 Topper (if fitted) 3 LCD Screen 5 Speakers (2 off)
2 Topbox Door 4 Player Marketing Module 6 Topbox Locking Tabs
(PMM) (if fitted) (2 off)
1-7
The EGM requires keys for locks and switches for effective security and operation. Keys and
locks may vary between venues. Keys can only be removed when returned to the locked
position.
Table 1-2 EGM Key Types
Name Function Type

Meter/Audit Key Accesses the Operator Mode Menu (refer to the
Switch Machine Modes chapter). Insert the meter/audit
key and turn it clockwise to the audit position.
Allows the operator to view the electromechanical
KEY_
meters (if fitted). Insert the meter/audit key and 0 01
turn it clockwise to the meter position.
Reset Key Allows the operator to reset the EGM after a
Switch (if fitted) handpay (refer to Machine Modes chapter). Insert
the reset key and then turn it clockwise and back
again.
KEY_
0 01
Lower Main Allows the operator to open the lower main door.
KEY
Door Lock Insert the key and turn it clockwise. _002
Belly Door Lock Provides security for the belly door along with the
KEY
belly door switch. Insert the key and turn it _002
clockwise.
Logic Cage Allows the operator access to the logic cage.

KEY
Lock (if fitted) Insert the key and turn it clockwise. _002
Bank Note Allows the operator access to remove the bank

KEY
Acceptor Cage note stacker. When two locks are fitted, one key _002
Door Lock(s) turns clockwise and the other key turns

(if fitted) anticlockwise to open.
Bank Note Allows the operator to remove bank notes from
KEY
Acceptor the stacker. Insert the key and turn it clockwise. _002
Stacker Lock(s) Open the door and remove the bank notes.
1-8
1.2 Functional Description

The carrier board contains the central processor and the software required for game generation
and video graphics. The backplane board distributes all data and control signals to and from the
carrier board.
The backplane board also distributes regulated low-voltage power from the power supply unit.
Figure 1-5 Typical EGM Functional Diagram
Electro
Topbox LCD Playbuttons mechanical
LCD Screen Speakers Screen and LEDs meters
Carrier Board Backplane Board
Validator
Bank Note
and/or Ticket Coin
Communications Interface Acceptor Diverter
Display and
Indicators
I/O
Network Processor/
Subsidiary Equipment Cashbox Hopper
Network Communications
(External communications
modules will vary with the
EGM configuration)
Coin Tray
VIFUNC_001
Some peripherals and modules are not fitted in some jurisdictions.
1-9
1.3 Specifications
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
Height of cabinet plus topbox (casino top) 1352mm (53.23")
Height of chop top cabinet (to trim) 1103mm (43.43")
Width at back of cabinet/ 540mm (21.26")/
width including trims 585mm (23.03")
Depth (at base) 425mm (16.73")
Minimum recommended console width 711mm (27.99")
Weight
With casino topbox and bank note acceptor (approximate) 105kg (232lb)
The power supply and monitor are capable of accepting different AC mains voltages.
Table 1-4 Supply Voltage Requirements
Mains Input Voltage

Minimum 100V AC
Maximum 240V AC
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz
Typical power consumption values are dependent on actual EGM configuration. The values
below are given for EGMs with high range options.
Table 1-5 Power Requirements with Dual LCD Screen Configuration
Mains Input Current 115V AC 240V AC

EGM Typical 1.65A 0.8A
Power Consumption at Nominal Voltage 115V AC 240V AC
EGM Typical (real power) 190W 190W
Typical Heat Load 650BTU/hr 650BTU/hr
1-10
Table 1-6 Auxiliary Power
Maximum Load Current 115V AC 240V AC

Auxiliary Power Outlet (main switch controlled) 1A 1A
Auxiliary Power Outlet (independently switched) 1A 1A
Power Consumption at Nominal Voltage 115V AC 240V AC
EGM Maximum (excluding auxiliary loads) Maximum allowed Maximum allowed
by PSU by PSU
Power Factor 115V AC 240V AC
>50% load, typical 0.95 0.95
Table 1-7 Environment
Operating Storage
Minimum Temperature 10°C (50°F) -20°C (-4°F)
Maximum Temperature 40°C (104°F) 60°C (140°F)
Relative Humidity 0 - 85% non-condensing 0 - 95% non-condensing
1-11
Notes
1-12
Service Manual Installation
Chapter 2
Installation
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 2-8

2.2.1 Mounting ................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up .................................................... 2-10
2.2.3 Configuring the EGM ............................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.4 Commissioning the EGM ..................................................................................... 2-12
2-1
Installation Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Front and Side View - Chop Topbox Dimensions ............................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-2 Front and Side View - Casino Topbox Dimensions ............................................................ 2-5
Figure 2-3 Footprint ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Figure 2-4 Clearances ......................................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-5 In-line Fixing ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-6 Fixing Back-to-Back ........................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-7 Fixing Isolated .................................................................................................................. 2-10
2-2
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

The following is required to install an electronic gaming machine (EGM):
 Jurisdictional approval (to be sighted).

 A floor plan.
 A suitable base on which to mount the EGM.
 An appropriate clearance between EGMs so that the doors may be opened without
obstruction (refer to the EGM clearance diagram).
 Access to mains power outlets and connection cables of peripheral devices to the EGM.
 EGM keys (when locks are fitted).
WARNING:
All mains wiring must be installed by a qualified electrician and comply with the
relevant national/jurisdictional standards for mains wiring.
The EGM is a heavy item. Follow the applicable national standard and code of
practice for manual handling.
The EGM is not to be installed in an area in which a water jet could be used.
If the AC power cord is damaged it must be replaced by the manufacturer, its
service agent or similarly qualified persons in order to avoid hazards.
CAUTION:
The EGM must be transported and handled with care. Ensure the EGM is not
dropped, severely bumped or inappropriately moved.
2-3
Figure 2-1 Front and Side View - Chop Topbox Dimensions
1103mm (43.42")
VIWSCAB_048
540mm (21.26") 425mm (16.73")
585mm (23.03")
2-4
Figure 2-2 Front and Side View - Casino Topbox Dimensions
1352mm (53.23")
VIWSCAB_025
540mm (21.26") 425mm (16.73")

585mm (23.03")
2-5
Figure 2-3 Footprint
537.3mm (21.15")
429.3mm (16.90")
90.0mm (3.54")
73.0mm (2.87")
52.5mm (2.07")
55.0mm (2.17")
65.0mm (2.56")
92.5mm (3.64")
392.3mm (15.44")
317.3mm (12.49")
175.0mm (6.89")
95.0mm (3.74")
56.0mm (2.20")
201.6mm (7.94")
2
3
6
405.5mm (15.96")
63.0mm (2.48")
15.0mm (0.59")
4
VIWSCAB_001
1 50.0mm (1.97") 50.0mm (1.97")

235.4mm (9.27")
376.0mm (14.80")
Legend
1 Mounting holes (4 off) 3 100mm x 30mm (3.94" 5 29.5mm x 22mm (1.16"
Drill to 10mm (0.39") x 1.18") aperture with x 0.87") offset from the
diameter from inside 3mm (0.12") radius vertical by 10 degrees.
cabinet to console corners
2 50mm x 50mm (2.16" x 4 60mm x 68mm (2.36" x 6 Mounting holes (2 off)
2.16") aperture with 2.68") aperture with Drill to 10mm (0.39")
3mm (0.12") radius 30mm (3.94") radius diameter from inside
corners corner and 6mm x cabinet to console
8.2mm key
2-6
Figure 2-4 Clearances
3
2 170mm (6.69")
710mm (27.95")
1 540mm (21.26")
4
600mm (23.62")
585mm (23.03")
5
6
95°
VIWSCAB_014
Legend
1 EGMs are flush to the 3 Minimum Spacing 5 Distance from outside of
wall Between EGMs wing to outside of wing
2 Minimum Base Width 4 Distance from outside 6 Door Swing Arc
of wing to outside of
meters
2-7
2.2 Installation Procedure
WARNING:
An appropriately licensed technician must install and commission the EGM.
The following procedures are used to mount, connect and commission the EGM into service.
WARNING:
Take care during shipping and transit to prevent EGMs from toppling. Secure all
loads prior to transport.
Ensure all EGMs and/or base assemblies being moved are secured to form a
single assembly.
Base assemblies or furniture must be constructed appropriately to support the
weight of the EGM as well as loads applied from forces imposed, in keeping with
relevant standards.
Installation and commissioning of EGMs, including configuring machine options and the
sealing/unsealing of logic cages must comply with the regulations of the jurisdictional authority.
2.2.1 Mounting
The EGM and the cabinet base that supports the EGM must be installed as follows to ensure
the assembled unit meets all safety requirements with regard to possible tip over. EGMs or
EGM/cabinet base assemblies must not be toppled by, for example, leaning on an open door or
attempted vandalism.
To mount the EGM to the cabinet base:
1. Position the EGM on the cabinet base, aligning it with the cable holes and other
penetrations (refer to EGM footprint figure).
WARNING:
There are four mounting hole positions in the base. The EGM must be fixed in all
four hole positions (two at the front and two at the back) to ensure the EGM meets
tip-over (stability) requirements.
2. Drill holes in the cabinet base to match the EGM mounting holes for bolts and nuts or use
the special-purpose fasteners provided to secure the EGM to the base.
3. Insert the fasteners, fit the nuts and tighten to ensure that the EGM is mounted securely.
2-8
Two or more adjacent bases must be fixed side-to-side, back-to-back or to a wall or floor.
Adjacent EGM bases installed in a row must be fixed to each other so that the row assembly
becomes an integrated structural unit.
Figure 2-5 In-line Fixing
VICAB_011
Legend
1 EGM 2 Cabinet Base 3 Fix Adjacent Bases to
Each Other
Bases supporting EGMs arranged back-to-back and not in a row must be fixed to each other at
the rear so that the assembly becomes an integrated structural unit.
Figure 2-6 Fixing Back-to-Back
11
VICAB_012
Legend
1 EGM 2 Cabinet Base 3 Fix Bases Back to Back
2-9
A base that supports an isolated EGM must either be fixed to a structural wall or fastened
securely to the floor.
Figure 2-7 Fixing Isolated
VICAB_013
Legend
1 Fix Bases to a Structural 3 EGM
Wall or to the Floor
2 Structural Wall 4 Cabinet Base
2.2.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up

Perform the following EGM connections and checks prior to start-up:
1. Open the lower main door.

2. Open the logic cage door and check that the carrier board is firmly seated in the logic cage.
NOTE:
For information on accessing PCBAs, refer to the relevant chapters.
It is not necessary to select the voltage, as the power supply assembly
automatically accepts a wide range of AC voltage.
3. Connect the EGM power cable to mains power. The power cable may enter the cabinet
either via an aperture in the base of the cabinet near the power supply or via an aperture in
the rear wall of the cabinet.
NOTE:
The AC mains power outlet socket shall be installed near the equipment and be
easily accessible.
The aperture in the rear wall of the cabinet is fitted with a cover plate. This cover
plate has a latch to allow a clamp to be fitted to the power cable. The purpose of
this clamp is to prevent the power cable from being accidentally disconnected. Use
the clamp if there is a reasonable risk that this may happen.
2-10
WARNING:
Visually check that the insulation of the power cabling has not been damaged
during the installation. Check that earthing leads or screws that might have been
moved during the installation are correctly attached.
4. Switch on the EGM and close the lower main door. The LCD screens and the lighting
system power up. The EGM performs self-testing procedures for a few moments and any
faults detected are highlighted by a message on the main LCD screen. To fix faults, refer to
the Machine Modes chapter - Current Lockup Menu section.
5. If the main LCD screen is fitted with a touch screen, carry out the touch screen calibration
procedure. For more information, refer to the Machine Modes chapter.
The EGM is ready to be configured.
2.2.3 Configuring the EGM

Configuring the EGM enables venues to specify the way an EGM operates. A variety of
identifications, options and settings need to be entered to configure the EGM.
To configure the EGM:
1. Follow the reset and restart procedure. For more information, refer to the Machine Modes
chapter - Start, Reset and Restart Procedure section. The procedure enables the operator
to set appropriate values and identifications from the Machine Options display and the other
Operator Setup/Selections menus presented in the Operator Mode Menu system.
2. Carry out any required system setup procedures on the site controller (if connected). These
may include:
 Configuring additional EGM items including serial number (to match the EGM serial
number), poll address, name for the base game variation number, jurisdiction code,
credit denomination and currency denomination.
 Configuring the EGM game items including game variation number, name for the game
variation number, game progressive group ID, name of the progressive levels in the
game and game configuration poll message data.
3. Access the Hopper Refill Menu display by turning the meter/audit key to meter and
selecting the Hopper Refill option from the menu displayed. Fill the hopper by following the
on-screen guidance and return to the game display by turning the meter/audit key to the
neutral position.
The EGM has been configured.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to fill the hopper before game play can commence.
2-11
2.2.4 Commissioning the EGM

With the EGM checked and powered up, carry out the following processes:
1. Check that the EGM program type and variation match the customer order. For more
information, refer to the Machine Modes chapter.
2. Observe the EGM self-tests for any faults. For more information, refer to the Machine
Modes chapter - Test/Diagnostics Mode section. Carry out a range of tests as appropriate
using the audit mode options.
3. If the EGM is operating on a network system, it may now be connected and installed on the
network. For installation procedures, refer to the manual for the specific communications
network used.
4. Ask the operator to read and record the values on the electromechanical meters (if fitted)
and electronic meters (as required by applicable jurisdictional requirements).
5. Where the venue permits, monitor game play operations for any faults:
 If a bank note acceptor is fitted, insert a valid bank note and confirm that it is read and
credited correctly. If the bank note is not accepted on the second attempt, repeat the
test on another bank note. If the second bank note fails to be accepted and credited,
replace the bank note acceptor.
 If a coin validator is fitted, test that coins are credited and that the hopper pays them
out correctly.
6. If a ticket printer is fitted, carry out the test operations under Operator Mode Menu >
Test/Diagnostics Mode Menu and appropriate maintenance operations.
7. Log installation data as specified by the appropriate jurisdictional requirements.
The EGM may now commence operations.
2-12
Service Manual Machine Modes
Chapter 3
Machine Modes
3.1 Modes of Operation ................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Play Mode ................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.1 Player Operation .................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.2 Main LCD Screen ................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes ................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.4 Playbuttons ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.5 EGM Self-Test ........................................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.6 Security .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.7 Light Tower........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.8 Electromechanical Meters .................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.9 Electronic Meters.................................................................................................. 3-14
3.2.10 Start, Reset and Restart Procedure ..................................................................... 3-15
3.3 Operator Mode Menu ............................................................................. 3-24

3.3.1 Machine Identification .......................................................................................... 3-27
3.3.2 Accounting Information ........................................................................................ 3-28
3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu ............................................................................... 3-38
3.3.4 Test/Diagnostics Mode ......................................................................................... 3-49
3.3.5 Operator Setup/Selections Menu ......................................................................... 3-60
3.3.6 Miscellaneous Menu ............................................................................................ 3-67
3.3.7 Current Active Lockups ........................................................................................ 3-77
3.4 Operator Mode Menu – Worldbase ....................................................... 3-78

3.4.1 Machine Identification .......................................................................................... 3-83
3-1
Machine Modes Service Manual
3.4.2 Operator Setup/Selections ................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.3 Accounting Information....................................................................................... 3-101
3.4.4 Diagnostics Information ...................................................................................... 3-120
3.4.5 Test/Diagnostics Mode ....................................................................................... 3-134
3.4.6 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................... 3-147
3.4.7 Current Lockup ................................................................................................... 3-157
3-2
List of Figures
Figure 3-1 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ..................................................................................3-5

Figure 3-2 Format of Game Display.....................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-3 Location of CompactFlash and Smart Card in Logic Cage ...............................................3-15
List of Tables
Table 3-1 Door Security Functions .....................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-2 Two-Tier Light Tower ..........................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-3 Three-Tier Light Tower .......................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-4 Four Tier Light Tower .........................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-6 Log Sizes ...........................................................................................................................3-38
Table 3-7 Details of Tests ..................................................................................................................3-53
Table 3-9 Log Sizes .........................................................................................................................3-120
Table 3-10 Details of Tests ..............................................................................................................3-137
3-3
3.1 Modes of Operation

The electronic gaming machine (EGM) operates in two modes:
 Play mode permits game play while the lower main door is closed and locked, the
meter/audit key is in the neutral position and there are no fault or lockup conditions.
 Audit mode enables the operator to configure the EGM, view audit information, carry out
EGM tests and reset EGM faults. To access this mode, set the meter/audit key to the audit
position.
3.2 Play Mode

In play mode the EGM:
 Permits game play.

 Displays graphics for player operation.
 Operates security and audit features.
 Monitors and records game play.
 Runs self-checking/testing.
 Displays guidance for players, operators and technicians.
Depending on how the EGM is configured, credits may be registered by:
 Inserting coins.
 Inserting tokens.
 Inserting bank notes.
 Using a cashless system.
In a cashless system, credits are transferred to and from the EGM by either a computer link or a
smart card. The EGM has security features to ensure that only valid currency is accepted.
The player determines how many credits to wager by pressing one of the [Bet] playbuttons. The
bet meter on the screen shows the credits wagered.
The player starts a game by pressing one of the active playbuttons. The EGM runs the game
sequence and displays the outcome on the screen.
The EGM is equipped with electronic audit meters that continuously monitor and record credit
movement and game activity. This information is used for audit calculations and security
purposes. Electromechanical meters may also be fitted.
If the EGM encounters an abnormal condition, it alerts the operator by automatically entering
lockup. In lockup, game play is disabled to prevent any further player interaction and guidance
information is displayed in the game message area.
3-4
Figure 3-1 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode
3-5
The figure below shows the format of a game display. The symbols on the screen will vary
depending on the game.
Figure 3-2 Format of Game Display
The credit, bet and win game meters show the number of credits applicable at the current stage
of the game. Comments appear in four message lines to guide players and operators as the
game progresses. The denomination icon can appear in either the top right or bottom right
corners of the screen. EGM conditions, including security alerts, are also displayed in the
message area. Examples of messages are:
 Game comments That’s A Winner
Good Luck
Well Done
 Feature information Four Free Spins Remaining
 Player instructions Game Over Play Now
1 Credit Per Line
 Lockup Message Door Open Belly Panel
Door Open Main
For information on lockup messages, refer to the Operator Mode Menu > Current Lockup
display.
In play mode the EGM operates with full security features. For example, the EGM monitors
operations and alerts operators if a malfunction or tampering occurs. Electronic meters and
electromechanical meters record details of game play and EGM operations in play mode.
3-6
The EGM provides menu controls that enable the venue to change options to suit player and
house preferences. These options may include:
 Game percentage.
 Base credit value (a game credit), EGM token amount for coin entry and acceptable bank
note denominations.
 Links to house and stand-alone progressives in various levels.
 Hopper coin-collect limit.
 Game gamble option.
 Volume settings for sounds and tunes.
For more information, refer to the Operator Mode Menu - Operator Setup/Selections Menu.
NOTE:
Jurisdictional requirements must be followed when configuring EGMs.
3.2.1 Player Operation

When the EGM is switched on and the lower main door is closed and locked, the EGM
automatically conducts a self-test. If no faults occur game play begins.
Credits are added to the EGM and the credit meter on the main LCD screen increments and the
mid-trim playbuttons become active and flash. The player may add more credits or press one of
the playbuttons to play the game.
The player selects the number of credits to bet. The number of bets selected is shown on the
bet meter on the main LCD screen.
To begin game play the player pushes the [Play] playbutton. The line combinations are
evaluated at the end of each game played. If a result is a winning combination, a win tune plays
and the main LCD screen shows the number of credits won in the win meter.
The player may send the credits in the win meter to the credit meter by pressing the [Take Win]
playbutton or collect the amount won as a payout by pressing the [Collect] playbutton. The
payout can be collected from the hopper (via the coin tray), the printer (via a ticket) or an
attendant (via a handpay).
When the player collects a win, the EGM prevents functions such as game play and currency
entry until the hopper has dispensed the coins into the coin tray. A hopper sensor counts the
coins being dispensed and the credit meter decrements to zero.
Due to the limit on the number of coins that can be held in the hopper and other payout
considerations, there is a limit to the number of coins that the EGM can pay out. This is called
the hopper collect limit and it may be set via the Operator Mode Menu, by the site controller or
by the host system, depending on EGM and game configuration.
When a player collects a win, the value of the game credits is greater than the hopper collect
limit or the EGM is not configured to pay out via the hopper and a printer is available, a ticket is
printed. The game credit on the screen and the Credit electronic meter are reset to zero.
3-7
When a player collects a win, the value of the game credits is greater than the hopper collect
limit and a printer is not available, the cancel credit procedure is used to handpay the amount:
 The message Cancel Credit Call Attendant is displayed (the value of credits to be
paid out is displayed).
 The attendant handpays the value of the credits and resets the EGM using the reset key.
 The message Credits paid out $99.99 is displayed on the screen.
 The Cancel Credit electronic meters and electromechanical meters record the number of
credits paid out.
 The game credit on the screen and the Credit electronic meter and electromechanical
meters are reset to zero.
Pressing the [Reserve] playbutton displays the message Machine Reserved on the screen.
This enables players to reserve an EGM for a short period. Pressing the [Service] playbutton
lights a tier in the light tower to catch the attention of floor attendants.
3.2.2 Main LCD Screen

The main LCD screen provides high-resolution graphics which can display attractive game
illustrations and animations, as well as player messages, operator menus and information
displays.
The simulated spinning reels take up most of the screen area. The area at the top of the screen
displays credit, bet and win information. The message display area is between these two areas.
The coin denomination icon is shown in the top right or bottom right of the screen.
The main LCD screen is fitted with a touch screen that enables games to be played by touching
designated areas of the screen.
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes

Sounds and tunes are used in combination with graphics and animation to increase game
appeal.
Different sounds signify various EGM conditions such as alarm, reel spin, reel stop, win, lose,
double-up win, jackpot bell, coins entering the EGM and coins falling to coin tray. Each game
has specific sounds and tunes. The volume of the sound system can be adjusted in the Sound
System Setup display.
A generic attract mode tune lasting approximately five seconds accompanies the occurrence of
the attract mode screen. It repeats at one minute intervals until attract mode is exited. Attract
mode is configured in the Attract Mode Setup display.
3.2.4 Playbuttons
Playbutton layouts vary in different jurisdictions and for different games. Each playbutton has a
LED behind it that may either be lit, unlit, flashing, or flashing at double speed, depending on the
game situation and the machine mode.
3-8
3.2.5 EGM Self-Test

When the EGM is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that continues in the
background as long as the EGM is in play mode. During the self-test, the EGM checks the
electronic meter data held in computer memory and carries out audit calculations using
essential meter counts. The self-audit calculation formula varies depending on EGM
configuration.
The memory holds up to three copies of the electronic meter data: Meter Set 1, Meter Set 2 and
Meter Set 3. If the data in one meter set does not match that in the other two sets, the data of
the two identical sets overwrites the single set.
3.2.6 Security
When the EGM is in play mode, it continuously operates with the following security features.
Coin Handling Assembly (if fitted)

The Coin Handling Assembly consists of a coin validator to determine the validity of inserted
coins, a coin diverter and coin chuting to direct coins to the correct destination and a photo-optic
module to monitor the position of the coin diverter. The Coin Handling Assembly is fitted and
adjusted at the factory to suit a specific coin denomination.
The coin entry is located on the mid trim and is set to accept a specific coin denomination for a
particular EGM. It does not accept oversized or bent coins.
The coin validator, coin chuting and diverter solenoid are mounted to a panel on the inside of
the lower main door. Coins pass through the validator after they are inserted into the coin entry.
Accepted coins are directed to the hopper or cashbox via the accept chute and rejected coins
are directed to the coin tray via the reject chute.
If the inserted coin is valid, the appropriate credits are registered in the game credit display and
game play may take place. The Cash In and Credit jurisdictional meters and the Cash In
electromechanical meter are incremented accordingly.
The credit meter on the game display accumulates in credits and the electronic meters
accumulate in whole and decimal monetary units. The electromechanical meters accumulate in
whole and decimal monetary units but only display to the nearest whole monetary unit.
Coins are sent to the hopper until it is full. After this, coins are diverted to the cashbox.
The EGM software monitors the signals from the Coin Handling Assembly. Unusual conditions
and faults such as Coin Acceptor Fault and Coin Diverter Fault are registered by
EGM lockup, video messages and increments in the appropriate diagnostic meters.
If the EGM software indicates that coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cashbox or
vice versa, the Cashbox Instead Hopper or Hopper Instead Cashbox diagnostic meter is
incremented. These totals allow adjustment and balancing of the hopper and cashbox
collections.
3-9
Hopper (if fitted)

If the hopper is empty and the player is in credit and collects a win, the EGM locks up and
display a Hopper Empty message and the Hopper Empty electronic meter increments. The
hopper is refilled according to house rules, after which game play may resume.
During a payout, the hopper disc rotates and passes coins onto the coin runner where they are
counted by the hopper photo-optic detector. After passing the detector, they are deposited in the
coin tray for the player to collect. Also:
 The Cash Out electronic meter and the Coins Out electromechanical meter are
incremented by the amount paid out.
 The game credit on the screen and the Credit electronic meter are decremented by the
amount paid out.
 A payout message is displayed on the screen showing the value paid out.
The EGM monitors the hopper operation and the coin’s passage from the hopper to the coin
tray. Unusual conditions and faults are registered by increments in the diagnostic meters, video
messages and EGM lockups. These fault conditions are Illegal Coin Out, Hopper
Empty, Hopper Jammed and Hopper Disconnected.
Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted)

The bank note acceptor consists of an optical scanning unit and a note stacker contained in
high-security housing. The scanning unit achieves a high percentage of acceptances. A second-
level scanning option can be initiated for high-denomination bank notes. During operation, the
bank note acceptor registers acceptances and rejections. Accepted bank notes increment the
Cash In electronic meter and electromechanical meter. Detailed information is recorded in the
Note Acceptor meters, which may be accessed from Operator Mode Menu > Accounting
Information Menu. These meters record the value and quantity of each bank note accepted. A
record is also kept of the last five bank notes accepted.
The EGM monitors the bank note acceptor operation and unusual conditions and faults are
registered by incrementing the diagnostic meters, by displaying messages and by causing the
EGM to lock up. The lockups and display messages include Note Acceptor Error and
Note Acceptor Out of Service. If the bank note stacker door is open, the alarm sounds
and the message Note Stacker Removed is displayed. A lockup occurs if the bank note
acceptor stacker becomes full. The lockup description and display message is Note Acceptor
Full.
The Machine Options menu enables the bank note acceptor to be set on or off and to be
configured to recognise specific bank note denominations.
3-10
Door Security
A number of mechanical and optical security switches may be used to monitor door access. All
mechanical security switches are battery-backed to enable door access to be detected even
when the EGM is not powered.
If a door fitted with a security switch is opened while the EGM is powered:
 A Door Open message is displayed on the screen, specifying which door is open (a Door
Mismatch message refers to an EGM fault where the mechanical and the optical door
security switches are not operating correctly).
 The alarm sound is heard.
 The EGM locks up, suspending game play.
 The appropriate Door Accesses diagnostic meter is incremented.
The condition is reset by closing the appropriate door or by correcting faulty or poorly aligned
mechanical/optical door switches. The security signals are typically distributed as follows.
Table 3-1 Door Security Functions
Security Mechanical Optical

0 Logic cage Main door
1 Topbox ----
2 Electromechanical meters ----
3 Cashbox door ----
4 Main door ----
5 Bank note stacker cage door ----
6 Belly panel door ----
NOTE:
The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the individual
EGM configuration.
In some jurisdictions, the cashbox door security switch function is not required. To meet this
jurisdictional standard, a loop-back plug is installed to simulate that the cashbox door is always
closed.
Door Security During Power Off

All doors are monitored when power is off. When power is turned on, a series of messages on
the main LCD screen show which doors have been opened and closed. Typical messages are
Door Open - Main, Door Open - Belly Panel, Security Cage Closed - Main
Board. The events are included in the EGM logs and time stamped to the power-on time. Refer
to Diagnostic Information Menu - Doors Log.
3-11
3.2.7 Light Tower

A multi-level light tower fitted on top of the EGM provides an additional level of customer
service, security and house control. The tower can have two, three, or four tiers of different
colours. The colours and functionality of the light tower are determined by individual market
requirements.
The light tower indicates one of four possible EGM states:
 Idle state exists when no other state exists.

 Service state exists when player presses the [Service] playbutton to request service
(change, drinks, etc.).
 Fault (Tilt) state exists when one of the following conditions exist:
 A lockup fault condition (excluding Upper Main Door Open and the Handpays
state), such as Logic Door Accesses or Note Acceptor Error.
 A non-lockup fault condition, such as Note Stacker Full or Printer Paper
Low.
 Handpays state exists when one of the following conditions exist:
 A Jackpot lockup.
 A Cancelled Credit lockup, or
 A Progressive Link jackpot lockup.
Two-Tier Light Tower

Typical two-tier light tower functions are as follows:
Table 3-2 Two-Tier Light Tower
CONDITION DOOR CLOSED DOOR OPEN

Top Light Bottom Light Top Light Bottom Light
Idle OFF OFF OFF FAST FLASH
Service ON OFF ON FAST FLASH
Fault SLOW FLASH OFF SLOW FLASH FAST FLASH
Handpays SLOW FLASH SLOW FLASH SLOW FLASH FAST FLASH
3-12
Three-Tier Light Tower

Typical three-tier light tower functions are as follows.
Table 3-3 Three-Tier Light Tower
Tier - Colour Status Indicates… Comment

All tiers No lights on Idle state No other state exists and all doors are
closed.
First red Slow flash Any security When open door(s) closed, a steady light
door open remains on until the next valid game is
played.
Second blue Slow flash Handpays Cancelled credit or jackpot lockup.
state
Service or Player request for service or EGM
reserved reserved.
Bottom yellow Slow flash Fault state Continues flashing until lockup removed.
Four-Tier Light Tower

Typical four-tier light tower functions are as follows.
Table 3-4 Four Tier Light Tower
Tier - Colour Status Indicates… Comment

All Tiers No lights on. Idle state No other state exists and all doors are
closed.
Top Green SLOW FLASH Any security When open door(s) closed, a steady
door open light remains on until next valid game
is played.
Second Red SLOW FLASH Handpays state Cancelled Credit or Jackpot lockup.
Third Yellow SLOW FLASH Service state or Player request for service or EGM
reserved reserved.
Bottom Blue SLOW FLASH Fault state Continues flashing until lockup
removed.
Specifying Light Tower Tiers

A DIP switch is provided at the base of the light tower board and this is used to set the number
of tiers used (two, three or four) to cater for different customer requirements.
For four-tier light towers, a coloured plastic segment surrounds each set of lights. For three-tier
light towers, the middle two sets of lights are combined. For two-tier light towers, the top two
sets and the bottom two sets of lights are combined.
3-13
3.2.8 Electromechanical Meters

The EGM may be fitted with electromechanical meters and electronic meters. These meters
form part of the comprehensive security system by recording the results of EGM operations.
NOTE:
An EGM fitted with electromechanical meters does not function if the meters are
not connected.
Due to factory tests, the meter values are not set to zero on delivery of an EGM.
Record the initial meter values before using the EGM.
The meters cannot be reset and are cumulative for the life of the meter. They accumulate and
display currency unless a stroke meter is used. A stroke meter provides a numerical count.
Currency accumulations are accurate but the meters only display amounts in whole units. To
read the electromechanical meters, turn the meter/audit key switch anticlockwise to illuminate
the area, then view the meters through the viewing window.
Electromechanical meters are monitored for abnormal conditions, cage accesses and meter
disconnection. When abnormal conditions are detected, the following steps are performed:
1. Game play is suspended and the alarm sounds.

2. The appropriate lockup message is displayed. One of the following:
Meters Faulty
Meters Cage Open
Meters Disconnected.
3. The appropriate electronic meter increments.
The condition is cleared when the EGM is reset, the lockup is removed and the door is closed.
Refer to Operator Mode Menu - Current Active Lockup.
3.2.9 Electronic Meters

The electronic meters record details relating to EGM operation, game play and player
interaction, as well as statistical counts, security events and past games. Players have the
assurance there is a record kept of recent win and pay events. When the EGM is switched on, it
automatically initiates a self-test that continues in the background as long as the EGM is in play
mode. During the self-test, the EGM checks the electronic meter data held in memory.
Some jurisdictions require electronic metering data to be stored in three separate battery-
backed RAM chips. In the case of a meter malfunction in which meters sets do not match, the
EGM displays an error message and the EGM locks up. This message can also indicate that the
game software has been changed or a serious EGM malfunction has occurred.
3-14
3.2.10 Start, Reset and Restart Procedure

When installing or replacing Gen7W high resolution software, the smart card and the
CompactFlash card need to be installed or replaced.
When replacing the existing software with emulated Mk6 games, only the CompactFlash card
needs to be replaced.
To insert the CompactFlash card, push it into the CompactFlash card socket on the carrier
board.
To insert the smart card:
1. Lift the cover of the smart card housing.

2. Insert the SIM-style smart card into the underside of the cover.
3. Close the cover.
Figure 3-3 Location of CompactFlash and Smart Card in Logic Cage
1 2
G03147
Legend
1 Smart Card 2 CompactFlash Card
3-15
Startup Sequence
After the smart card and CompactFlash card have been installed and the mains power is turned
on, the EGM starts up. The main LCD screen and the topbox LCD screen (if fitted) display a No
Signal Input message. After the system loads the operating system software, the main LCD
screen and the topbox LCD screen (if fitted) turn white while the graphics software loads. The
buttons light up and flash. The screen goes black and system messages display. Finally, the
game appears on the screen(s) as testing is complete.
Configuring with the SetChip Program

To configure a new EGM in a venue, it is necessary to install and run the jurisdictional SetChip
CompactFlash card and amend the configuration settings as necessary before installing the
system and game CompactFlash card.
NOTE:
After clearing SRAM in the following procedure, the Accounting and Diagnostic
electronic meters are set to zero.
To run the SetChip program:
4. Take the SetChip CompactFlash card and insert it into the CompactFlash card slot in the
logic cage (refer to Figure 3-3). Restart the EGM. The following display is shown.
3-16
5. Set the game and panel type by pressing the [Cashout] or [Take Win] button to toggle game
and key panel type.
NOTE:
Buttons may vary depending on jurisdiction and configuration. Refer to on-screen
instructions for more information.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to clear the static random access memory (SRAM).
The Version Menu display is shown.
7. Press [Spin] to proceed to the Jurisdictional Options Menu display.
3-17
8. Set the jurisdiction by following on-screen instructions.
If configuring the Worldbase to operate a Paltronics Mystery link:

Set Mystery option to Allowed.
Set BONUS Transfer Type to Bonus Award Allowed.
9. Press [Spin] to access the Main Menu display.
3-18
10. Select Money Setup from the menu. Make the required changes to the configuration
options.
11. Return to the Main Menu display. Select Payout Setup from the menu. Make the required
changes to the configuration options.
3-19
12. Return to the Main Menu display. Select Gameplay Setup from the menu. Make the
required changes to the configuration options.
13. Return to the Main Menu display. Select Miscellaneous Options from the menu. Make
the required changes to the configuration options.
3-20
14. Return to the Main Menu display. Select Bill Validator Setup from the menu. Make the
required changes to the configuration options.
15. Return to the Main Menu display. Select Save All Options from the menu.
16. Open the logic cage door and save the new configuration options.
17. Turn the power off and remove the SetChip CompactFlash card from the logic cage.
18. Install the system and game CompactFlash card.
19. Turn the power on. The game displays and a Memory Error - Game EPROM Changed
message is seen below the game images.
20. Turn the meter/audit key clockwise. The Operator Mode Menu display is shown.
3-21
21. Open the EGM lower main door. Select Operator Setup/Selections from the menu.
22. Select Game Machine Options from the menu.
3-22
23. Change the necessary options in the Game Machine Options display including the
EFT/Bonus Options, Bill/Voucher Options and Device Driver Options.
24. Open the logic door and select Save Machine Options to set the configuration as selected.
25. Change other items in the Operator Setup/Selections Menu display as required.
26. Return to the Operator Mode Menu display and select Machine Identification from the
menu.
27. Review the configuration settings in the Machine Identification display.

Note that the BACC ID firmware number is not displayed at this time.
28. Follow the on-screen guidance to reset the static RAM. The message Waiting For
BACC To Verify displays. After a short delay, the BACC CRC security check is
completed. The BACC ID firmware number is now seen in Machine Identification display.
29. Shut the logic door and the lower main door. Turn the meter/audit key off to display the
game. The message Memory Reset is displayed beneath game images
The EGM is ready for game play.
3-23
3.3 Operator Mode Menu

Audit mode and the Operator Mode Menu display address jurisdictional and
accounting/management information requirements, allow the EGM configuration to be changed
and facilitate EGM testing and fault finding. Enter the Operator Mode Menu display by turning
the meter/audit key to audit. Select the desired options by following the on-screen guidance and
pressing the appropriate buttons.
NOTE:
The displays and options covered in this chapter are typical. However, slight
variations may occur between markets.
NOTE:
The Operator Key - Turn off to exit message does not display if a
lockup is present.
Instructions are given on each display to guide the operator through the menus and options
available. Any active lockups are indicated by a flashing message at the bottom of the screen.
3-24
Table 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Overview
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Operator Mode Menu Machine Identification Machine Identification
Device Driver ID
Accounting Information Current Meters
Periodic Meters
Current Credits
Replay of Previous Games
Gamble Statistics
Feature Statistics
Game Statistics
Cash Information
Multi-Game Accounting
Multi-Denomination Accounting
Diagnostic Information Security Meters
Error Log
Panic Log
BACC Signature Log
Bill Acceptor Log
Voucher In Log
Ticket/Voucher Out Log
EFT In Log
EFT Out Log
Bonus Log
Multiplier Log
Doors Log
Power Log
Printer Signature Log
General Log
Combined Logs
AFT Logs
Smartcard Information
Display PSD Signature
Test/Diagnostics Mode Lamp Test
Button Test
Coin Entry Test
Hopper Test
Monitor Test
Sound Effects Test
Factory Test
Combination Test
Mechanical Reel Test
Bill Acceptor Test
Printer Test
Hyperlink Combination Test
Gamma Protocol
3-25
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Operator Mode Menu Operator Setup/Selections Game Machine Options
Jurisdictional Settings
Progressive Level Setup
Location Name Setup
Real Time Clock Setup
Sound System Setup
Attract Mode Setup
Bet/Line and Variation Setup
SPC Configuration
Meter Scaling Factor
Market Specific Setup
Miscellaneous BACC CRC Seed Setup
Printer CRC Seed Setup
Out of Service
Operator Initiated Cancel Credit
Operator Force Game End
Disable Secure Enhanced
Validation
Print Audit Vouchers
Touch Screen
Enable/Disable Help Screen
Meter Window Error Recovery
System Memory Usage
Current Lockup
3-26
3.3.1 Machine Identification

The Machine Identification display provides essential EGM information such as machine
number, credit value, percentage return and jackpot limit.
3-27
3.3.2 Accounting Information

The Accounting Information displays and options provide information for government authorities
as well as additional financial and statistical details. This includes periodic performance details,
game replays and game statistics. Most of the information cannot be altered, although some
details may be changed through Operator Setup/Selections  Game Machine Options.
Access displays by following the on-screen instructions and pressing the appropriate buttons.
3-28
Current Meters
The Current Meters displays provide the financial counts of EGM activity. Items include
turnover, total wins and amounts inserted in the bill acceptor device.
(Screen below is repeated for Meter Set 2 and 3.)
Periodic Meters
The Periodic Meters displays contain the same information as the Current Meters displays but
the values held relate only to a specified period specified by venue management. The periodic
meters can be reset via Operator Mode Menu > Miscellaneous Menu.
3-29
Current Credits (Current Credit Types)

The Current Credit Types display shows the types of credits currently available. The meters can
be reset via Operator Mode Menu > Miscellaneous Menu.
Replay of Previous Games (Game Replay)

The Replay Previous Games display allows the operator to replay the most recent games
played on the EGM. The most recent game is game number 1. Approximately twenty of the
most recent games are available to be replayed. Because these game histories are stored
dynamically in memory, the exact number of games available to be recalled varies depending on
the available memory. Options provide additional levels of detail, should they be required.
3-30
Gamble Statistics (Suit Gamble Statistics)

The Gamble Statistics display shows the amount gambled with the [Gamble] button or taken
with the [Take Win] button for each winning combination.
Feature Statistics
The Feature Statistics display varies with each game installed. It provides specific analysis of
game play and features for selected installed games.
3-31
Game Statistics
Details of game play are recorded and displayed through the Game Statistics option. Bets and
lines chosen on the EGM are analysed and the number of games played and the money won is
displayed for each sub-division.
3-32
3-33
Cash Information
The Cash Information Menu display and options provide details of bill acceptor activities
including information on the last five bills accepted. Voucher in and voucher out details are
recorded and displayed.
3-34
Bill Acceptor Meters (Bill Acceptor Information)

The Bill Acceptor Information display provides financial counts of EGM activity. Items include
total and periodic value, amounts inserted and rejected and the last five bills received in the bill
acceptor.
Vouchers In Meters
The Vouchers In display shows information about vouchers inserted in the bill acceptor. Items
include voucher in type, value, cashable or non-cashable status and the last five vouchers
received.
3-35
Vouchers Out Meters

The Vouchers Out display shows information about vouchers output by the EGM. Items include
voucher out type, value, cashable or non-cashable status, winning amount within a range and
the last five vouchers printed.
Multi-Game Accounting (Sub Game Information)

The Multi-Game Accounting display provides play statistics on installed games.
3-36
Multi-Denomination Accounting (Sub Denom

Information)
The Multi-Denomination Accounting display provides information on denomination values used
in the EGM.
3-37
3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu

The Diagnostic Information Menu display provides access to security meter counts, logs and
extra information provided for signature security checks.
Information is recorded in the logs whenever an event occurs. Events are listed in time order
until the log is filled. Later events continue to be recorded and the record of the earliest events
is deleted, so each log lists the latest series of events. The sizes of the logs are given below.
Table 3-6 Log Sizes
Log Name Size (No. of Events)

Error Log 100
Panic Log 10
BACC Log 100
Bill Acceptor Signature 20
Log
Voucher In Log 50
Voucher Out Log 80
EFT In Log 35
EFT Out Log 35
Bonus Log 35
Multiplied Jackpot Log 35
Doors Log 100
Power Log 50
Printer Signature Log 20
General Log 1000
Combined Logs 1700
AFT Log 100
3-38
Security Meters
The Security Meters display provides information about door accesses, disconnections and
meter faults.
Error Log
The Error Log display shows the date, time and type of the most recent error messages. The
log holds information on the last 100 errors.
3-39
Panic Log
The Panic Log display provides information about critical errors from which the EGM cannot
recover. The log holds information on the last ten errors.
BACC Signature Log

The BACC Signature Log provides security check information for the bill acceptor.
3-40
Bill Acceptor Log

The Bill Acceptor Log display provides a record of events generated by the bill acceptor’s driver.
Items include cashbox removed and bill acceptor disconnected. The log holds information on
the last 100 events.
Voucher In Log
The Voucher In Log display shows voucher-in events.
3-41
Ticket /Voucher Out Log

The Voucher/Voucher Out Log display shows voucher and voucher-out events.
EFT In Log
Electronic funds transfers (EFT) that add credits in the EGM are itemised on this display.
The EFT In Log Extra Information display provides security check information.
3-42
EFT Out Log

EFT out events are itemised on the EFT Out Log display.
The EFT Out Log Extra Information display provides security check information.
Bonus Log
Bonus events are itemised in the Bonus Log display.
The Bonus Log Extra Information display provides security check information.
3-43
Multiplied Jackpot Log

Multiplied jackpot events are itemised on the Multiplied Jackpot Log display.
The Multiplied Jackpot Extra Information display provides security check information.
Doors Log
The Doors Log display provides a record of every door in the EGM including the bill acceptor
door. The opening and closing of any door is reported and logged. The log holds information
on the last 100 events.
3-44
Power Log (Power State Log)

Power on/off events are shown in the Power Log display. The log holds information on the last
50 events.

Printer signature events are logged on the Printer Signature Log display.
The Printer Signature Extra Information display provides security check information.
3-45
General Log
The General Log display provides a record of general events, which include all events except for
those in the previously shown displays. The log holds information on the last 1000 events.
Combined Logs
The Combined Logs itemizes events from all logs. Items are listed in order of occurrence.
3-46
AFT Logs
The AFT Log display shows information about advanced funds transfers.
The Smartcard Information display provides information about the smart card used to verify
Aristocrat software.
3-47
Display PSD Signature

The PSD Signature display provides algorithms which will create and check security check
codes for the system.
3-48
3.3.4 Test/Diagnostics Mode

The Test/Diagnostics Mode Menu displays address repair and maintenance tasks for the EGM.
The items on the Test/Diagnostics Mode Menu display are designed to test EGM components
and features. The Test/Diagnostics Menu display can be seen below.
Test/diagnostics mode can only be entered when the following conditions are met (otherwise, a
warning display is shown):
 Credit is zero.
 Lower main door is open.
 No other lockups are active.
 No game is currently in progress.
3-49
Lamp Test
The Lamp Test display allows the operator to test the button lamps, animation lamps and light
tower lamps. The state of individual lamps can be set to either on, off, flashing slowly or flashing
quickly. The operator can then observe the lamps to verify correct operation.
Standard Lamp Test

The Standard Lamp Test display allows a standard lamp test.
3-50
Feature Topbox Lights Test

The Feature Topbox Lights test allows the operator to test the operation of the feature topbox
lights.
Coin Entry Test

The Coin Entry Test display enables the operator to test the coin entry devices. The operator
selects the state of the coin validator and coin diverter, then enters coins and observes changes
in the display readings.
3-51
Hopper Test
The Hopper Test display enables the operator to test the hopper. To perform this test, press the
[Take Win] playbutton to activate a hopper payout of ten coins. Close the lower main door and
reinsert all the coins. Any error messages are displayed on the screen.
Button Test
The Button Test display allows the operator to test the function and operation of each button.
3-52
Monitor Test (Video Monitor Test Menu)

The Video Monitor Test Menu display and options allow a range of tests to be conducted on the
main LCD screen. Inspect the display to determine whether the tests have been passed or
failed. The available tests are described in the table below.
Table 3-7 Details of Tests
Test Description
Colour Balance Test Tests the shading of primary colours to confirm the adjustment of
colours
Gray Scale Test Tests the colour guns are equal in intensity
12.5% White Screen Displays a slightly lighter colour than black
Test
Basic Colours Test Displays four collared rectangles - red, green, blue, white
Mode Colours Test Displays the full range of colours available
Red Colour Purity Test Activates all red pixels
Green Colour Purity Activates all green pixels
Test
Blue Colour Purity Test Activates all blue pixels
Black Colour Purity Activates all black pixels
Test
White Colour Purity Activates all white pixels
Test
3-53
Sound Effects Test (Sound System Tests)

The Sound System Tests display allows the operator to change the volume setting of the EGM
and to listen to the sound effects used by the EGM.
Factory Test
The Factory Test display automatically conducts several tests simultaneously. Tests conducted
include door switch, main LCD screen and sound system tests. The test continues until stopped
by the operator or until an error occurs. If an error occurs, the type of failure is noted on the
display.
3-54
Combination Test
The Combination Test display allows the operator to select a combination of symbols. This test
is used to check the graphics and sound output associated with any winning combination.

The Mechanical Reel Test display is only available when the EGM has mechanical reels and the
game is configured to use them.
3-55
Bill Acceptor Test

The Bill Acceptor Test display enables an operator to feed bills into the bill acceptor for
acceptance testing. Accepted bills display Validated in the appropriate denominational line.
Printer Test
The Printer Test display shows the connection status of the printer (connected or not connected)
and highlights paper roll problems. This display shows if the printer is selected (as fitted and
installed) in the device driver options in the Game Machine Options display.
If a printer is not fitted or enabled, the message Printer Not Enabled or Available
displays.
3-56

The Hyperlink Combination Test display is only available when the Hyperlink is connected and
on-line.
Gamma Protocol (GAMMA Menu)

The GAMMA Menu display provides procedures relating to the point to point GAMMA A Link
Communications Protocol (ACP) used between an EGM and its machine communications
interface (MCI).
The displays provide details on GAMMA ACP configuration, devices (components of the games
and communications elements) and diagnostics.
3-57
3-58
3-59
3.3.5 Operator Setup/Selections Menu

The Operator Setup/Selections Menu display gives the operator access to configurable options
of the EGM.
3-60
Game Machine Options

The Game Machine Options display allows the operator to control and change some aspects of
EGM operation. Options are selected and changed by following the on-screen guidance and
pressing the appropriate buttons. The EGM options are stored in the CompactFlash card
connected to the carrier board.
NOTE:
Approval from the jurisdictional authority is required before the items in the Game
Machine Options display can be changed.
The logic door must be open to save changes to machine options.
3-61
The Jurisdictional Settings display provides a detailed list of the configurations and settings
required by the jurisdictional authority that have been selected in the SetChip procedure and
initiated from the audit mode menus.

The Progressive Level Setup display allows the operator to set each winning combination to
correspond to a link progressive jackpot, if enabled.
3-62
Location Name Setup (Location Setup)

The Location Setup display allows the operator to enter the name of the venue. This name is
displayed in the Machine Identification display and on cash and metering vouchers.

The Real Time Clock Setup display allows the real time clock to be set.
3-63
Sound System Setup

The Sound System Setup display allows the operator to change the volume setting of the EGM
and to hear the sound effects used by the EGM.
Attract Mode Setup

The Attract Mode Setup display enables the operator to select options for and enable or disable
attract mode. Attract mode occurs when the EGM has been idle for the amount of time
specified on this display. It displays graphics and plays music designed to attract players.
3-64
Bet/Line and Variation Settings (Bet and Variation

Settings)
The Bet and Variation Settings display enables setup of maximum bet limits, play lines and
other settings.
SPC Configuration Screen

The SPC Configuration Screen display shows information and settings for the serial protocol
converter (SPC).
3-65
Mechanical Meters Options

The Mechanical Meters Options display enables the electromechanical meter options to be set.
Market Specific Options

The Market Specific Options display enables the market specific options to be set.
3-66
3.3.6 Miscellaneous Menu

The Miscellaneous Menu displays provide a range of operational features relating to the bill
acceptor, periodic meters, demonstrations, accounting printouts, cancel credit procedures and
EGM status.
BACC CRC Seed Setup (Bill Acceptor CRC Seed Setup)

The Bill Acceptor CRC Seed Setup display allows the operator to reset the bill acceptor cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) seed setup meter. Reset this meter each time the bill cashbox is
emptied.
3-67

The Printer CRC Seed Setup display allows the operator to reset the printer cyclical redundancy
check (CRC) seed setup meter.
Out of Service
The Out of Service option enables a floor attendant to place an EGM into or remove an EGM
from out of service mode as required.
3-68
Operator Initiated Cancel Credit Request

The cancel credit request procedure is processed though the operations provided by the
Operator Initiated Cancel Credit Request display.
Operator Force Game End Request

The Operator Force Game End Request display enables the operator to end the game
immediately and allow cashout.
3-69
Disable Secure Enhanced Validation

The Disable Secure Enhanced Validation display enables a CRC check to be carried out by an
authorised attendant at a suitable time (if allowed by jurisdiction).
Print Audit Vouchers (Print Audit Tickets)

Selecting an option from the Print Audit Vouchers display results in a printed voucher with a
variety of details.
3-70
Primary Accounting Meters

Selecting Primary Accounting Meters prints out a voucher as shown below.
Progressive and Game Play Meters

Selecting Progressive and Game Play Meters prints out a voucher as shown below.
3-71
Configuration Information
Selecting Configuration Information print out a voucher as shown below.
Peripheral Information
Selecting Peripheral Information prints out a voucher as shown below.
3-72
Progressive Controller Setup

Selecting Progressive Controller Setup prints out a voucher showing progressive controller
setup information and is only available when the controller is connected and on-line.
Touch Screen (Calibrate Touch Screen)

Selecting the Calibrate option enables the repositioning of the human touch point to the screen
recognition point. The menu enables both calibration and the testing of the new position.
Calibration must be performed on the following occasions:
 Upon installing the EGM in the venue.

 Upon converting the game to another touch screen game.
 Upon adjusting the image height, width or position.
 Upon repairing, replacing or exchanging the LCD screens.
NOTE:
Periodic recalibration is recommended.
Menu structure may vary.
3-73
1. Select Calibrate from the menu and follow the onscreen directions.
NOTE:
Be sure to touch and then lift the finger from the centre of the square. The screen
is calibrated with reference to where the finger is lifted from the screen.
NOTE:
Again, be sure to lift the finger from the centre of the upper square.
3-74
2. Select Touch Screen Test from the menu and follow the onscreen directions.

The Enable/Disable Help Screen display enables operators to turn the help screen on or off.
3-75

The Meter Window Error Recovery display allow the operator to recover from a lockup of the
EGM after a "suspicious internal condition has been detected and trapped".
Operator intervention requires a special smart card (large Win lockup Reset). Software will
confirm that this special smart card is present before allowing the lockup to be cleared.
System Memory Usage

The System Memory Usage display enables operators to check system memory usage.
3-76
3.3.7 Current Active Lockups

The EGM has an extensive system of self-monitoring and automatically enters fault mode when
abnormal conditions are detected.
In fault mode, the game message area displays guidance information and the EGM is disabled
to prevent any further player interaction. Enter the Current Active Lockups display by turning the
meter/audit key to audit and selecting Current Lockup from the Operator Mode menu.
The menu displays with conditions requiring attention highlighted by the characters ***. Each
lockup condition has an associated help screen outlining the procedure for fixing the fault.
The Current Active Lockups display is shown below.
NOTE:
Upon exiting audit mode, the operator is returned to the state immediately
preceding entering audit mode.
When in lockup state, the operator can exit audit mode with lockups active but will
be unable to play games.
This process is different from the previous software version, which did not allow
the operator to exit audit mode with lockups active.
3-77
3.4 Operator Mode Menu – Worldbase

Audit mode and the Operator Mode Menu display address jurisdictional and
accounting/management information requirements, allow the EGM configuration to be changed
and facilitate EGM testing and fault finding. Enter the Operator Mode Menu display by turning
the meter/audit key to audit. Select the desired options by following the on-screen guidance and
pressing the appropriate buttons.
NOTE:
The displays and options covered in this chapter are typical. However, slight
variations may occur between markets.
The Operator Key - Turn off to exit message does not display if a
lockup is present.
Instructions are given on each display to guide the operator through the menus and options
available. Any active lockups are indicated by a flashing message at the bottom of the screen.
3-78
Table 3-8 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Overview
Machine Identification
Operator Setup/Selections
Machine Options
Credit Limit Configuration
Hopper Refill
Currency Setup
Denomination Options
EFT/AFT/Bonus Options
Bill/Voucher Options
Device Driver Options
Location Name Setup
Sound System Setup[
Attract Mode Setup
Bet/Line Variation Settings
SPC Configuration
G2S Configuration
Host Setup
Descriptor Setup
Communications Setup
SCEP Setup
OCSP Setup
Cabinet Profile
Cabinet Limits
Slot Point Limits
ID Reader Options
ID Reader Messages
Player Options
Player Messages
Event Handler Setup
Bonus Awards Enabled
Game Play Options
Progressive
3-79
Accounting Information
Current Credits
Sub-Game Accounting
Wager Category
Sub-Denomination Accounting
Cash Information
Bill Acceptor Meters
Voucher In Meters
Voucher Out Meters
Last Ten Bills Received
Last Ten Vouchers In
Last Ten Vouchers Out
Replay of Previous Games
Gamble Statistics
Current meters
Main 1
Main 2
Other
JP Occurrence
JP Accumulated
JP Wagered
Bonus Jackpots
Periodic Meters
Main 1
Main 2
Other
JP Occurrence
JP Accumulated
Feature Statistics
Game Statistics
Games Played
Money Won
Operating Percentage
3-80
Diagnostic Information
Security Meters
Error Log
Panic Log
BACC Signature Log
Bill Acceptor Log
Voucher In Log
EFT In Log
EFT Out Log
Bonus Log
Multiplier Log
Doors Log
Power Log
General Log
Combined Logs
AFT Logs
WAT Logs
Script Log
Package Log
Package Success Log
Smartcard Info
PSD Signature
Media Display Content Log
Test/Diagnostic Mode
Lamp Test
Standard Lamp Test
Feature Top Box Lights Test
Bezel Lights Test
Button Test
Coin Entry Test
Hopper Test
Monitor Test
Colour Balance Test
Grey Scale Test
12.5% White Screen Test
Basic Colours Test
Red Colour Purity Test
Green Colour Purity Test
Blue Colour Purity Test
Black Colour Purity Test
White Colour Purity Test
3-81
Test/Diagnostic Mode
Sound Effects Test
Factory Test
Combination Test
Bill Acceptor Test
Printer Test
Gamma Protocol
Gamma Configuration
Gamma Devices
Gamma Diagnostics
Network Diagnostics
Current Connections
NTP Diagnostics
Reel Shutter Test
Reel LED Test
Miscellaneous
BACC CRC Setup
LCD Panel CRC Seed Setup
Out of Service
Disable Secure Enhanced. Validation
Touch Screen
Calibrate
Touch Screen Test
Enable/Disable Help Screens
System Memory Usage
Card Reader CRC Seed Setup
Key On Credits
Current Lockup
3-82
3.4.1 Machine Identification

The Machine Identification display provides essential EGM information such as machine
number, credit value, percentage return and jackpot limit.
3.4.2 Operator Setup/Selections

The Operator Setup/Selections display gives the operator access to configurable options of the
EGM.
Machine Options
The Machine Options display enables the operator to control and change some aspects of EGM
operation. Options are selected and changed by following the on-screen guidance and pressing
the appropriate buttons. The EGM options are stored in the CompactFlash card connected to
the carrier board.
NOTE:
Approval from the jurisdictional authority is required before the items in the Game
Machine Options display can be changed.
The logic door must be open to save changes to machine options.
3-83

The Game Machine Options display enables the operator to control and change some aspects
of EGM operation. Options are selected and changed by following the on-screen guidance and
pressing the appropriate buttons. The EGM options are stored in the CompactFlash card
connected to the carrier board.

Set Machine ID to a GMID which is configured on the PAL Config EPROM.
Credit Limit Configuration

The Credit Limit Configuration display allows the venue to specify the amount above which
winnings need to be hand paid by an attendant.
3-84
Hopper Refill
The Hopper Refill display enables the hopper (if fitted) to be filled with coins. The coins are
placed directly into the hopper. Instructions on the screen guide the operator in removing the
lockup and returning the EGM to gameplay
Currency Setup
The Currency Setup display enables the local currency details to be specified.
3-85
Denomination Options
The Denomination Option display shows the denominations that are available. If only one is
available the screen below appears.
EFT/AFT/Bonus Options
The EFT/AFT/Bonus Options display allows the venue to enable or disable cashless transfers
and specify limits for them.

Set Bonus Transfer Mode to Enabled.
3-86
Bill/Voucher Options
The Bill/Voucher Options display enables the venue to list acceptable notes and specify
validation settings for vouchers.
Device Driver Options

The Device Driver Options display allows the peripherals in the cabinet to be specified.
3-87
The Jurisdictional Settings display provides a detailed list of the configurations and settings
required by the jurisdictional authority that have been selected in the SetChip procedure and
initiated from the audit mode menus.

The Progressive Level Setup display enables the operator to set each winning combination to
correspond to a link progressive jackpot, if enabled.

Set Protocol Selected to DACOM Controlled.
3-88
Location Name Setup

The Location Setup display enables the operator to enter the name of the venue. This name is
displayed in the Machine Identification display and on cash and metering vouchers.

The Real Time Clock Setup display allows the real time clock to be set.
3-89
Sound System Setup

The Sound System Setup display enables the operator to change the volume setting of the
EGM and to hear the sound effects used by the EGM.
Attract Mode Setup

The Attract Mode Setup display enables the operator to select options for and enable or disable
attract mode. Attract mode occurs when the EGM has been idle for the amount of time specified
on this display. It displays graphics and plays music designed to attract players.
3-90
Bet/Line Variation Settings

The Bet and Variation Settings display enables setup of maximum bet limits, play lines and
other settings.
SPC Configuration
The SPC Configuration Screen display shows information and settings for the serial protocol
converter (SPC).
3-91

The Market Specific Setup display enables the local market details to be specified.
G2S Configuration
The G2S Configuration displays allows the operator to configure the G2S (Game to System)
protocol which allows the EGM to communicate with back office management systems.
Host Setup
The Host Setup display enables the network address of the casino management system to be
specified.
3-92
Descriptor Setup
The Descriptor Setup display lists the available communication classes and their details for the
G2S protocol.
Communications Setup
The Communications Setup display provides information on the communications setup of the
EGM.
3-93
SCEP Setup
The SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) Setup display enables certificates to be
requested and obtained from a remote server.
OCSP Setup
The OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) Setup display enables the status of a certificate
to be determined.
3-94
Cabinet Profile
The Cabinet Profile display allows the G2S options for a cabinet to be set. The options can be
set from a remote G2S host or via the EGM audit screens.
Cabinet Limits
The Cabinet Limits display shows the G2S cabinet limits. The options can be set from a remote
G2S host or via the EGM audit screens.
3-95
Slot Point Limits

The Slot Point Limits display is not used in this configuration.
ID Reader Options
The ID Reader Options display shows the ID Reader options that are set remotely from a G2S
host.
3-96
ID Reader Messages
The ID Reader Messages display shows the messages listed in the ID Reader profile. The
options can be set from a remote G2S host or via the EGM audit screens.
Player Options
The Player Options display is used to track player action and incentive points allocated to the
player.
3-97
Player Messages
The Player Messages display shows the messages listed in the Player profile. The options can
be set from a remote G2S host or via the EGM audit screens.
Event Handler Setup

The Event Handler Setup display is generally used for debugging and provides internal details
(events) of the classes for the G2S communications protocol.
3-98
Bonus Awards Enabled

The Bonus Awards Enabled display shows the G2S bonus pay methods supported by the EGM.
Game Play Options

The Game Play Options display is not used in this configuration.
3-99
Progressive
The Progressive display provides details of the details of the last jackpot won.
3-100
3.4.3 Accounting Information

The Accounting Information displays and options provide information for government authorities
as well as additional financial and statistical details. This includes periodic performance details,
game replays and game statistics.
Current Credits
The Current Credit Types display shows the types of credits currently available.
3-101
The Multi-Game Accounting display shows supported RTP (Return To Player) statistics on
installed games.
Subgame Accounting
The Subgame Accounting display provides detail meter information for each RTP.
3-102
Wager Category
The Wager Category display shows how many wager categories within one paytable have
individual coin-in meters. (Category set to 0 if only one paytable.)
The Multi-Denomination Accounting display provides information on denomination values used
in the EGM.
3-103
Sub-Denomination Accounting
The Sub-Denomination Accounting display shows the detail meters information for each
available denomination.
3-104
Cash Information
The Cash Information display and options provide details of bill acceptor activities including
information on the bills received. Voucher in and voucher out details are recorded and
displayed.
Bill Acceptor Meters

The Bill Acceptor Information display provides financial counts of EGM activity. Items include
total and periodic value, amounts inserted and rejected and the last five bills received in the bill
acceptor.
3-105
Voucher In Meters
The Vouchers In display shows information about vouchers inserted in the bill acceptor. Items
include voucher in type, value, cashable or non-cashable status and the last five vouchers
received.
Voucher Out Meters

The Vouchers Out display shows information about vouchers output by the EGM. Items include
voucher out type, value, cashable or non-cashable status, winning amount within a range and
the last vouchers printed.
3-106
Last Ten Bills Received

The Last Ten Bills Received display shows information on the last ten bills received by the
EGM.
Last Ten Vouchers In

The Last Ten Vouchers In display shows information on the last ten vouchers received by the
EGM.
3-107
Last Ten Vouchers Out

The Last Ten Vouchers Out display shows information on the last ten vouchers output by the
EGM.
Replay of Previous Games (Game Replay)

The Replay of Previous Games display enables the operator to replay the most recent games
played on the EGM. The most recent game is game number 1. Approximately twenty of the
most recent games are available to be replayed.
3-108
Gamble Statistics
The Gamble Statistics display shows the amount gambled with the [Gamble] button or taken
with the [Take Win] button for each winning combination.
3-109
Current Meters
The Current Meters displays provide the financial counts of EGM activity. Items include
turnover, total wins and amounts inserted in the bill acceptor device. These meters cannot be
reset.
Main 1
The Main 1 display provides information on the financial activity of the machine.
3-110
Main 2
Other
The Other display provides information on other machine activity.
3-111
JP Occurrence
The JP Occurrence display provides a list of the available jackpot levels and the hits for each.
JP Accumulated
The JP Accumulated display provides accumulated totals for each of the jackpots available.
3-112
JP Wagered
The JP Wagered display provides information about the amount bet on each jackpot level.
Bonus Jackpots
The Bonus Jackpots display enables the venue to award a jackpot to a player. The venue may
also instruct the machine to multiply jackpot wins (MJT).
3-113
Periodic Meters
The Periodic Meters displays contain the same information as the Current Meters displays but
can be reset so the values relate only to a specified period specified by venue management.
Main 1
3-114
Main 2
Other
The Other display provides information on other meter activity of the machine.
3-115
JP Occurrence
The JP Occurrence display provides a list of the available jackpot levels and the hits for each.
JP Accumulated
The JP Accumulated display provides accumulated totals for each of the jackpots available.
3-116
Feature Statistics
The Feature Statistics display varies with each game installed. It provides specific analysis of
game play and features for selected installed games.
Game Statistics
Details of game play are recorded and displayed through the Game Statistics option. Bets and
lines chosen on the EGM are analysed and the number of games played and the money won is
displayed for each sub-division.
3-117
Games Played
The Games Played display shows the details of the games played.
Money Won
The Money Won display shows details of the money won in the current games.
3-118
Operating Percentage
The Operating Percentage display shows the actual RTP operating percentage.
3-119
3.4.4 Diagnostics Information

The Diagnostic Information menu display provides access to security meter counts, logs and
extra information provided for signature security checks.
Information is recorded in the logs whenever an event occurs. Events are listed in time order
until the log is filled. Later events continue to be recorded and the record of the earliest events is
deleted, so each log lists the latest series of events.
The sizes of the logs are given below.
Table 3-9 Log Sizes
Log Name Size (No. of Events)

Error Log 100
Panic Log 10
BACC Signature Log 100
Bill Acceptor Log 20
Voucher In Log 50
Ticket/Voucher Out Log 80
EFT In Log 35
EFT Out Log 35
Bonus Log 35
Multiplier Log 35
Doors Log 100
Power Log 50
Printer Signature Log 20
General Log 1000
Combined Logs 1700
AFT Logs 100
3-120
Security Meters
The Security Meters display provides information about door accesses, disconnections and
meter faults.
Error Log
The Error Log display shows the date, time and type of the most recent error messages. The log
holds information on the last 100 errors.
3-121
Panic Log
The Panic Log display provides information about critical errors from which the EGM cannot
recover. The log holds information on the last ten errors.
BACC Signature Log

The BACC Signature Log provides security check information for the bill acceptor.
3-122
Bill Acceptor Log

The Bill Acceptor Log display provides a record of events generated by the bill acceptor’s driver.
Items include cashbox removed and bill acceptor disconnected.
Voucher In Log
The Voucher In Log display shows voucher-in events.
3-123

The Ticket/Voucher Out Log display shows ticket and voucher-out events.
EFT In Log
The EFT In Log display shows the electronic funds transfers (EFT) that put credits in the EGM
are itemised on the EFT In Log display.
3-124
EFT Out Log

The EFT Out display shows itemized EFT out events.
Bonus Log
The Bonus Out Log display shows itemized Bonus events.
3-125
Multiplier Log
The Multiplier Log display shows itemized Multiplier events.
Doors Log
The Doors Log display provides a record of every door in the EGM including the bill acceptor
door. The opening and closing of any door is reported and logged.
3-126
Power Log
Power on/off events are shown in the Power Log display.

The Printer Signature Log display shows Printer signature events.
3-127
General Log
The General Log display provides a record of general events, which include all events except for
those in the previously shown displays. The log holds information on the last 1000 events.
Show MMC/GAM State
3-128
Combined Logs
The Combined Logs itemizes events from all logs. Items are listed in order of occurrence.
Show MMC/GAM State
3-129
AFT Logs
The AFT Log display shows information about advanced funds transfers.
WAT Logs
The WAT (Wagered Account Transfers) Logs display shows the content of the G2S WAT
transactions log.
3-130
Script Log
The Script Log display shows details of the most recent G2S download command. This log will
be cleared during a game install.
Package Log
The Package Log display shows details of the most recent G2S game package command. This
log is cleared following a RAM clear process.
3-131
Package Success Log

The Package Success Log display shows the same information as the Package Log display but
is not cleared when a RAM clear is done.
The Smartcard Information display provides information about the smart card used to verify
Aristocrat software.
3-132
PSD Signature
The PSD Signature display provides algorithms which create and check security check codes
for the system.
Media Display Content Log

The Media Display Content Log display shows the events between the media display content
and the EGM, if Service Window is supported.
3-133
3.4.5 Test/Diagnostics Mode

The Test/Diagnostics Mode displays address repair and maintenance tasks for the EGM. The
items on the Test/Diagnostics Mode Menu display are designed to test EGM components and
features.
Test/diagnostics mode can only be entered when the following conditions are met (otherwise, a
warning display is shown):
 Credit is zero.
 Lower main door is open.
 No other lockups are active.
 No game is currently in progress.
Lamp Test
The Lamp Test displays allow the operator to test the button lamps, animation lamps, light tower
lamps, topbox and bezel lights. The state of individual lamps can be set to either on, off, flashing
slowly or flashing quickly. The operator can then observe the lamps to verify correct operation.
Standard Lamp Test

The Standard Lamp Test display allows a standard lamp test.
3-134
Feature Topbox Lights Test

The Feature Topbox Lights test allows the operator to test the operation of the feature topbox
lights.
Bezel Lights Test

The Bezel Lights test allows the operator to test the operation of the bezel lights.
3-135
Button Test
The Button Test display enables the operator to test the function and operation of each button.
Coin Entry Test

The Coin Entry Test display enables the operator to test the coin entry devices. The operator
selects the state of the coin validator and coin diverter, then enters coins and observes changes
in the display readings.
3-136
Hopper Test
The Hopper Test display enables the operator to test the hopper. To perform this test the
operator activates a hopper payout of coins, then closes the lower main door and reinserts all
the coins. Any error messages are displayed on the screen.
Monitor Test
The Monitor Test options allow a range of tests to be conducted on the main LCD screen.
Inspect the display to determine whether the tests have been passed or failed.
The available tests are described in the table below.
Table 3-10 Details of Tests
Test Description
Colour Balance Test Tests the shading of primary colours to confirm the adjustment
of colours
Gray Scale Test Tests the colour guns are equal in intensity
12.5% White Screen Test Displays a slightly lighter colour than black
Basic Colours Test Displays four coloured rectangles - red, green, blue, white
Red Colour Purity Test Activates all red pixels
Green Colour Purity Test Activates all green pixels
Blue Colour Purity Test Activates all blue pixels
Black Colour Purity Test Activates all black pixels
White Colour Purity Test Activates all white pixels
3-137
Sound Effects Test

The Sound Effects Tests display enables the operator to change the volume setting of the EGM
and to listen to the sound effects used by the EGM.
Factory Test
The Factory Test display automatically conducts several tests simultaneously. Tests conducted
include door switch, main LCD screen and sound system tests. The test continues until stopped
by the operator or until an error occurs.
3-138
Combination Test
The Combination Test display enables the operator to select a combination of symbols. This test
is used to check the graphics and sound output associated with any winning combination.
3-139
Bill Acceptor Test

The Bill Acceptor Test display enables an operator to feed bills into the bill acceptor for
acceptance testing. Accepted bills display Validated in the appropriate denominational line.
Printer Test
The Printer Test display shows the connection status of the printer (connected or not connected)
and highlights paper roll problems. If a printer is not fitted or enabled, the message Printer
Not Enabled or Available displays.
3-140

The Hyperlink Combination Test display is only available when the Hyperlink is connected and
online.
3-141
Gamma Protocol
The GAMMA Protocol display provides procedures relating to the point to point GAMMA A Link
Communications Protocol (ACP) used between an EGM and its machine communications
interface (MCI).
The displays provide details on GAMMA ACP configuration, devices (components of the games
and communications elements) and diagnostics.
Gamma Configuration
The Gamma Configuration display provides information on the configuration of the Gamma
protocol.
3-142
Gamma Devices
The Gamma Devices display provides information on the components of the games and
communications elements.
Gamma Diagnostics
The Gamma Diagnostics display provides information for use in resolving problems with the
Gamma protocol.
3-143
Network Diagnostics
The Network Diagnostics displays shows read-only network information in two sub-menus.
Current Connections
The Current Connections display shows the network addresses, ports and state of the network.
NTP Diagnostics
The NTP Diagnostics display shows the NTP server address and details, if connected to an
NTP server.
3-144

The Mechanical Reel Test display is only available when the EGM has mechanical reels and the
Reel Shutter Test

The Reel Shutter Test display is only available when the EGM has mechanical reels and the
3-145
Reel LED Test

The Reel LED Test display is only available when the EGM has mechanical reels and the game
is configured to use them.
3-146
3.4.6 Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous menu displays provide a range of operational features relating to the bill
acceptor, periodic meters, demonstrations, accounting printouts, cancel credit procedures and
EGM status.
BACC CRC Setup

The BACC CRC Seed Setup display enables the operator to reset the bill acceptor cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) seed setup meter. Reset this meter each time the bill cashbox is
emptied.
3-147

The Printer CRC Seed Setup display enables the operator to reset the printer cyclical
redundancy check (CRC) seed setup meter.
LCD Panel CRC Seed Setup

The LCD Panel CRC Seed Setup display enables the operator to reset the LCD panel cyclical
redundancy check (CRC) seed setup meter.
3-148
Out of Service
The Out of Service option enables a floor attendant to place an EGM into or remove an EGM
from out of service mode as required.

The Operator Initiated Cancel Credit Request display enables the operator to carry out the
cancel credit procedure.
3-149

The Operator Force Game End Request display enables the operator to end the game
immediately and allow cashout.
Disable Secure Enhanced Validation

The Disable Secure Enhanced Validation display enables a CRC check to be carried out by an
authorized attendant at a suitable time (if allowed by jurisdiction).
3-150
Touch Screen (Calibrate Touch Screen)

Selecting the Calibrate option enables the repositioning of the human touch point to the screen
recognition point. The menu enables both calibration and the testing of the new position.
Calibration must be performed on the following occasions:
 Upon installing the EGM in the venue.

 Upon converting the game to another touch screen game.
 Upon adjusting the image height, width or position.
 Upon repairing, replacing or exchanging the LCD screens.
NOTE:
Periodic recalibration is recommended.
Calibrate
The calibrate display enables the operator to re-calibrate the screen by repositioning the finger
touch point to the screen recognition point.
3-151
Touch the middle of the red square on the lower left corner of the screen.
Touch the middle of the red square on the upper right corner of the screen.
3-152
Touch Screen Test

The touch screen test allows the operator to test the calibration of the screen.
Using your fingertip draw something on the screen. When finished press the [Exit] button on the
lower right corner on the screen.
3-153

The Enable/Disable Help Screen display enables operators to turn the help screen on or off.

The Meter Window Error Recovery display allow the operator to recover from a lockup of the
EGM after a suspicious internal condition has been detected.
Operator intervention requires a special smart card. Software will confirm that this special smart
card is present before allowing the lockup to be cleared.
3-154
System Memory Usage

The System Memory Usage display enables operators to check system memory usage.
Card Reader CRC Seed Setup

The Card Reader CRC Seed Setup display enables the operator to reset the card reader
cyclical redundancy check (CRC) seed setup meter.
3-155
Key On Credits
The Key On Credits display enables an amount to be nominated and transferred to the credit
meter without currency entering the EGM.
3-156
3.4.7 Current Lockup

The EGM has an extensive system of self-monitoring and automatically enters fault mode when
abnormal conditions are detected.
In fault mode, the game message area displays guidance information and the EGM is disabled
to prevent any further player interaction. Enter the Current Active Lockups display by turning the
meter/audit key to audit and selecting Current Lockup from the Operator Mode menu.
The menu displays with conditions requiring attention. Each lockup condition has an associated
help screen outlining the procedure for fixing the fault.
The Current Active Lockups display is shown below.
NOTE:
Upon exiting audit mode, the operator is returned to the state immediately
preceding entering audit mode.
When in lockup state, the operator can exit audit mode with lockups active but will
be unable to play games.
This process is different from the previous software version, which did not allow
the operator to exit audit mode with lockups active.
3-157
Notes
3-158
Service Manual Cabinet
Chapter 4
Cabinet
4.1 General Description ................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 Cabinet and Doors ................................................................................... 4-5

4.2.1 Lower Main Door .................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 Upper Main Door .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Belly Door ............................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Hinges .................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.5 Door Latches and Keys ........................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.6 Key Switches ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.7 Cabinet Security ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.8 Logic Cage ........................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.9 Coin Chute Module (if fitted) ................................................................................ 4-18
4.2.10 Mid Trim ............................................................................................................... 4-19
4.2.11 Pay Panel ............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.2.12 Coin Tray (if fitted) ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.2.13 Cashbox and Chute ............................................................................................. 4-24
4.2.14 Main LCD Screen ................................................................................................. 4-24
4.3 Player Marketing Module (PMM) (if fitted) ............................................ 4-25

4.3.3 Machine Communications Setup ......................................................................... 4-27
4.4 Electromechanical Meters (if fitted) ..................................................... 4-29
4-1
Cabinet Service Manual
4.5 Topbox ....................................................................................................4-30

4.5.1 Topbox Door ......................................................................................................... 4-30
4.5.2 Casino Topbox and LCD Screen ......................................................................... 4-31
4.5.3 Chop Topbox, Lighting and Artwork (if fitted) ....................................................... 4-33
4.6 Topper (if fitted)......................................................................................4-34

4.6.1 Topper Components............................................................................................. 4-34
4.6.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.7 Wing Lighting .........................................................................................4-36
4.8 Light Tower (if fitted) .............................................................................4-37

4.8.1 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure................................................................ 4-38
4.9 Audio System ....................................................................................................... 4-39
4.9.1 Audio Setup .......................................................................................................... 4-39
4.10 Bank Note Acceptor Cage (if fitted) ......................................................4-41

4.10.1 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 4-41
4.11 Maintenance ...........................................................................................4-43
4-2
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 Belly Door and Artwork .......................................................................................................4-8

Figure 4-2 Belly Door Flasher ..............................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-3 Hinge Module ...................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-4 Upper and Lower Main Door Latching ..............................................................................4-12
Figure 4-5 Key Switches Removal and Replacement ........................................................................4-14
Figure 4-6 Abloy Keyway and Quick Change Core ............................................................................4-14
Figure 4-7 Logic Cage .......................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-8 Coin Chuting Assembly and Coin Paths ...........................................................................4-18
Figure 4-9 Mid Trim and Playbuttons .................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-10 Playbutton - Exploded View ............................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-11 Coin Tray ........................................................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-12 Player Marketing Module ................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-13 Variation to Face of PMM (Initial Display Message) .......................................................4-27
Figure 4-14 Electromechanical Meters ..............................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-15 Casino Topbox and Topper ............................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-16 Chop Topbox ..................................................................................................................4-33
Figure 4-17 Oval Topper Components ..............................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-18 Cabinet Lighting..............................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-19 Light Tower .....................................................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-20 Standard Speakers, Woofer and Large Amplifier ...........................................................4-39
Figure 4-21 Cage Housing and BNA Access .....................................................................................4-42
List of Tables
Table 4-1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader Characteristics ....................................................................4-26

Table 4-2 Liquid Crystal Display Characteristics ................................................................................4-27
4-3
4.1 General Description

The electronic gaming machine (EGM) cabinet, doors, topbox and player marketing module tray
house the major components of the EGM.
The cabinet provides security to the inside of the EGM. The doors and cabinet also provide a
rigid structure for mounting EGM components. The doors are secured to the cabinet with high-
strength hinges. The belly door enables access to the bank note acceptor stacker.
The player marketing module (PMM) enables player interface components to be attached and
communications devices to be stored. The optional topbox provides a large, static artwork
display or an LCD display.
The major components of the EGM are located within the cabinet, on the doors or in the topbox.
This chapter details the following components.
In the cabinet:
 Key switches.
 Cabinet door security.
 Cashbox chute (if fitted).
 Player marketing module (if fitted).
 Logic cage.
On the lower main door:
 Mid trim, coin entry (if fitted) and playbuttons.

 Door latch assembly and security.
 Belly door and belly door artwork.
 Light chamber.
 Coin tray (if fitted).
On the upper main door:
 Door latch assembly and security.

 Main LCD screen.
In or on the topbox:
 Lighting and reflector (if fitted).

 Topbox artwork (if fitted).
 Light tower (if fitted).
 Topper (if fitted).
 Topbox LCD screen (if fitted).
Refer to the General Description chapter for external and internal pictures of the EGM.
4-4
4.2 Cabinet and Doors

The cabinet is comprised of a one-piece shell. It is welded together with strengthening gussets
and rails for rigidity. Doors, brackets and plates are welded to or integrated with the assemblies
to provide mountings for other EGM components.
4.2.1 Lower Main Door

The lower main door is hinged on the left side.
To open the lower main door:
1. Insert the lower main door key and turn it clockwise.

2. Pull the door open.
To close and lock the lower main door:
1. Push the lower main door closed.

2. Remove the key before or after closing the door by turning the door key anticlockwise.
NOTE:
The upper main door must be closed before the main door is closed.
Removal and Replacement Procedure

To remove the lower main door:
1. Follow procedure above and remove the upper main door.

2. Disconnect the lower main door looms from the backplane PCB and remove cable ties
securing the looms to the cabinet.
3. Remove lower main door gas strut by using a small flat blade screwdriver to prise off the
spring clip that retains the ball in the gas strut socket.
4. Remove lower main door earth braid.
5. Lift off lower main door.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.
CAUTION:
The door is a heavy item. Follow the national standard and code of practice for
manual handling.
4-5
4.2.2 Upper Main Door

The upper main door is hinged on the left side.
To open the upper main door:
1. Open the lower main door.

2. Open the upper main door by pulling release lever on the right side.
3. Pull the upper main door out towards you.
To close the upper main door, push the door until it latches.
NOTE:
The topbox door must be closed before the upper main door is closed.

To remove the upper main door:
1. Open the lower main door and switch off the EGM.
2. Open the upper main door.
3. Remove the topbox door.
4. Disconnect all connectors and looms from the main LCD screen.
5. Remove the topbox door (refer to the Topbox section).
6. Remove the earth braid that bridges the door and the cabinet.
7. Remove the gas shock at the ball connection on the door by using a small flat blade
screwdriver to prise off the spring clip that retains the ball in the gas shock socket.
8. Lift off the upper main door.
4.2.3 Belly Door

A belly door enables access to the belly panel artwork, the belly panel lighting system and the
bank note stacker.
The door features a hinge and two stays that fix the belly door to the lower main door. The door
security includes a cherry pushbutton switch mounted in the lower main door.
The belly door is hinged along the bottom of the door and pivots out and down.
To open the belly door:
1. Insert the belly door key and turn it clockwise.

2. Pull the belly door out towards you.
To close and lock the belly door:
1. Push the belly door closed.

2. Remove the key before or after closing the door by turning the belly door key anticlockwise.
4-6
Removal and Replacement Procedures

To remove the belly door housing:
1. Open the belly door.

2. Release the clip fastener on the top of the moulded belly door housing.
3. Slide the housing forward to disconnect the hooks from the steel plate sides of the housing.
4. Drop the housing down and remove it from the EGM.
The belly door LED lighting is located behind the artwork on the underside of the top of the belly
door reflector panel.
To remove the belly door lighting:
3. Remove the housing from the EGM as previously described.
4. Disconnect the loom from the LED board.
5. Close the belly door to gain access to the LED lighting board.
6. Remove the screws that fix the lighting board to the belly door.
7. Remove the lighting board.
4-7
Figure 4-1 Belly Door and Artwork
VIWS
C AB_0
22
4
3
2
1
Legend
1 Belly Door Artwork 3 Belly Door
Housing
2 Fastening Clip 4 Piano Hinge
The belly door flasher controller (if fitted) is used to flash the LEDs in the belly door. It is located
on the right side of the back of the lower main door. If the flasher malfunctions, replace the
controller with a new module.
NOTE:
The belly door flasher controller contains components that are not RoHS
compliant. The flasher controller may only be used in jurisdictions that do not
require RoHS compliance.
4-8
Figure 4-2 Belly Door Flasher
VIWSCAB_054
To remove the flasher controller:
2. Remove the loom from the right side of the flasher controller.
3. Push on the four tabs to push down the four clips holding the flasher controller to the
bracket.
4. Remove that flasher controller from the EGM.
To remove the belly door artwork:

2. Remove the belly door housing as previously described.
3. Slide the artwork out of the housing.
4-9
4.2.4 Hinges
Door hinges consist of two parts: the female hinge and the male hinge. The male hinges are
fixed to the doors with two fasteners and the female hinges are fixed to the cabinet with two
fasteners.
Each male hinge has a pin with a nylon washer that fits into the female hinge in the
corresponding door or cabinet. These pins must locate correctly before tightening the fasteners.
Figure 4-3 Hinge Module
1
00
S_
IN GE
SH
VIW
Legend
1 Male Hinge 2 Female Hinge
4-10
4.2.5 Door Latches and Keys

Door latches are provided for the upper and the lower main door and the belly door. The latch
assemblies use a cam-locking system for each of the doors.
Remove the key by turning it anticlockwise. A secondary lock system is provided as an option
for the lower main door.
When a door closes, the cabinet cams rotate and interlock to secure the door to the cabinet on
pressure from the door pin.
The latches are shielded on both sides by metal plates for additional security.

To remove the upper and the lower main door latches:
3. Disconnect the loom to the optic connector on the cabinet latch assembly on the lower main
door only.
4. Disconnect the loom to the switches on both doors.
5. Remove the two nuts that secure the latch assembly to the cabinet.
6. Lift the latch assembly off the mounting studs.
To remove the belly door latch:
3. Remove the playbutton panel by accessing two fasteners on the back of the door and
disconnecting playbutton switch assemblies from the playbutton housings.
4. Remove the latch assembly by removing the two nuts that secure the assembly to the mid
trim.
5. Remove the screw that secures the latch assembly and two metal plates.
6. Slide and lift the two metal plates up and remove it from the assembly.
7. Remove the latch assembly from underneath.
4-11
Figure 4-4 Upper and Lower Main Door Latching
4
5
6
1
VIWSCAB_052
Legend
1 Lower Main Door Latch 4 Upper Main Door 7 Lock Panel
Bracket Assembly
2 Lower Main Door 5 Upper Main Door
Cabinet Latch Assembly
3 Upper Main Door Latch 6 Lower Main Door
Bracket Assembly Cabinet Latch Assembly
4-12
To remove the keyed lock from the cabinet:
2. Remove the nuts above and below the latch assembly. Remove the latch assembly from
the EGM.
3. Remove the cam nut, cam washer and cam from the back of the lock panel.
4. Remove the rotation limiting washer from the lock. Note the position of the stops on the
rotation limiting washer, as it will make replacement easier.
5. Remove the lock nut and lock washer from the lock barrel.
6. Withdraw the lock barrel from the lock panel.
NOTE:
The procedure for lock removal is the same for all keyed locks.
4.2.6 Key Switches

The reset and meter/audit key switches are used to access and reset EGM software.
The key switches are fixed to a common plate mounted to the inside wall of the cabinet. The
switches are connected to the backplane board by a trunk loom, which transfers the switch
signals to the carrier board for processing.

To remove the key switches:
3. Unplug the key switch loom from the panel mounted connection.
4. Remove the two nuts fastening the assembly to the cabinet wall.
5. Remove the key switch assembly from the cabinet.
6. Remove the individual key switches from the assembly using the following procedure:
a. Unplug or de-solder the loom from the key switch.
b. Remove the lock nut and washer from the switch body.
c. Pull the switch from the mounting plate.
4-13
Figure 4-5 Key Switches Removal and Replacement
LOCK_
001
1 3
Legend
1 Mounting Plate 2 Reset Key Switch 3 Meter/Audit Key Switch
Abloy Locks
The EGM may be fitted with high-security Abloy locks. The locks feature a quick change core
facility in which the keyed core of the lock is fitted separately from the lock barrel. Locks may be
rekeyed in a matter of seconds without having to dismantle the lock assembly.
To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and pull out the lock
assembly.
Figure 4-6 Abloy Keyway and Quick Change Core
LOCK_002
4-14
4.2.7 Cabinet Security

The doors incorporate security monitoring through mechanical switches and an optical sensor.
If the security devices do not provide the appropriate signals to the carrier board, an alarm
sounds, game play is disabled and the appropriate machine lockup message displays on the
main LCD screen.
A mechanical switch and a photo-optic sensor are both monitored for the lower main door
security. Mechanical switches are monitored for the upper main door and for the belly door
security. When the lower main door or the belly door is opened:
 A message Door Open - Main or Door Open - Belly displays on the screen.
 The alarm sound plays.
 Game play is suspended.
 The event is recorded in the Doors log in the diagnostic meters.
 The diagnostic meters for door accesses are incremented.
The message Door Mismatch Main indicates a condition where the mechanical and the
optical door security switches report contradictory door status indicators. To clear the condition,
ensure that all door latches are fully engaged or correct the faulty switch or sensor.
The photo-optic sensor consists of an emitter and detector. Both the emitter and the detector
are mounted on the cabinet. Light from the emitter travels through the acrylic light-pipe attached
to the cabinet door when the lower main door is closed properly.

To remove the optical sensor:
2. Unplug the looms to the switch and the optics.
3. If necessary, remove the bank note acceptor (BNA) assembly to gain access to the latch
assembly. For more information, refer to the Bank Note Acceptor chapter.
4. Remove the latch assembly from the cabinet.
5. Remove the optical housing and PCB assembly.
To remove the mechanical door switch:
2. Unplug the switch loom.
3. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, prise the mechanical switch from the cabinet latch bracket.
Replace the switch by firmly pushing it back into position.
4-15
4.2.8 Logic Cage

The logic cage is a steel enclosure with a hinged front door that is attached to the shelf
assembly. The cage houses the EGM logic PCBAs and part of the backplane board. The door of
the cage has a sliding latch that enables a security seal to be fitted. The door may be fitted with
a battery-backed microswitch used to detect if the logic cage door has been opened. In addition,
one or two security key locks (optional) may be fitted to the logic cage door.
The logic cage slots into the back of the shelf assembly with two tabs and is fastened to the
shelf by two screws. Brackets and plastic guides locate PCBAs within the logic cage. The
backplane board is mounted at the back of the logic cage. When a PCBA is fitted into the logic
cage, it travels along the guides and is aligned with the corresponding multi-way connector on
the backplane.
Figure 4-7 Logic Cage
VIWSCAB_008
4-16

To remove the logic cage and backplane board:
3. Open the logic cage door by flipping the door up.
4. Disconnect the VGA cable from the logic cage.
5. Carefully lever out the carrier board assembly (carrier board and COM express module)
using the extractors.
6. Disconnect all of the looms from the backplane board. Label the connectors (if necessary)
to facilitate replacement.
7. Remove the one fastener inside the logic cage attaching the logic cage to the cabinet shelf
at the front.
8. Remove the one fastener under the logic cage attaching the cage to the cabinet shelf at the
front.
9. Gently pull the logic cage from the EGM. The tabs at the back of the cage will disengage
from the cabinet shelf.
10. Remove the logic cage and backplane board from the EGM.
NOTE:
Follow standard electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedures when
removing PCBAs.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure

To disassemble the logic cage:
1. Remove the logic cage.

2. Remove the backplane board mounting bracket assembly by removing the four screws
securing the assembly to the logic cage.
3. Remove the fan unit (if fitted) by removing the screws securing it.
4. Remove the PCB guides by pulling them from their location holes.
Assembly is a reversal of the disassembly procedure.
4-17
4.2.9 Coin Chute Module (if fitted)

The coin chute module is in the lower main door and returns rejected coins to the user and
sends accepted coins to the hopper or cashbox.
Figure 4-8 Coin Chuting Assembly and Coin Paths
COIN_007
4 3 2
Legend
1 Coin Validator 3 Accepted Coins to Hopper
2 Rejected Coins to Coin tray 4 Accepted Coins to Cashbox
For more information, refer to the Coin Handling Assembly chapter.
4-18
4.2.10 Mid Trim

The mid trim panel provides an area for the playbuttons and coin entry to be mounted on.
The coin entry device is a two-part assembly. The bank note acceptor fits into the bank note
entry aperture and a denomination display identifies acceptable currency.
Figure 4-9 Mid Trim and Playbuttons
VIWSCAB_023
1 2 3
Legend
1 Playbutton 2 Bash Button 3 Mid Trim
Both mechanical playbutton and LCD playbutton mid trims are available.
Mechanical Playbutton Assembly (if fitted)

The playbuttons are the interface between the player and the EGM. Different games have
different configurations of buttons. The buttons are mounted onto the mid trim panel.
To remove the mechanical playbutton assembly:
3. Disconnect the loom from the mid trim to the backplane board and remove the associated
cable ties.
4. Unscrew the two screws inside the door that hold the top portion of the mid trim and the
associated playbuttons.
5. Slide the mid trim forward to disengage the two front hooks and remove.
4-19
Figure 4-10 Playbutton - Exploded View
VICAB_027
Playbutton labels show players and operators what each playbutton does. Some games have
different playbutton labels.
To change a playbutton label:
2. Remove the mid trim as previously described.
3. Grasp the playbutton switch assembly, turn it anticlockwise and draw it downwards and
away from the EGM. (Do not draw the switch out directly.)
4. Remove the playbutton plunger by pressing down the lugs and popping the plunger out of
the playbutton bezel.
5. Place a small flat-headed screwdriver between the playbutton cap and the plunger surround
and lever off the playbutton cap.
6. Remove the playbutton label.
7. Place the new label between the playbutton and the legend plate.
8. Clip the playbutton cap into place on the plunger.
9. Replace the plunger and switch in the mid trim.
10. Replace the mid trim in the EGM.
11. Switch on the EGM and close the lower main door.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver to remove the playbutton cap without removing the
plunger. This could damage the playbutton bezel and cause the switch to jam.
4-20
To replace a playbutton LED:
2. Remove the mid trim as previously described.
3. Grasp the switch assembly and turn it anticlockwise. Draw the assembly downwards and
away from the mid trim.
4. Grasp the micro switch and switch holder between the thumb and forefinger and pull out the
faulty LED wedge. Remember the orientation of the polarisation indicator.
5. Gently push the replacement LED wedge into the switch holder, ensuring that its orientation
is the same as the faulty LED removed.
6. Replace the switch assembly by aligning pips on the assembly with positions in the
playbutton body and press upwards.
7. Screw the top portion of the mid trim back onto the cabinet.
8. Switch on the EGM. Close and lock the lower main door.
If a playbutton does not light up when it should, check the connections and the LED wedge.
LCD Playbutton Assembly (if fitted)

The Nteractiv LCD playbutton assembly allows playbutton labels, game play information,
animations and messages, controlled by the game software, to be displayed on an LCD screen
under the buttons.
To remove the Nteractiv LCD playbutton assembly:
3. Disconnect the following looms from the backplane board:
a. J11, J25 and J37 from P11, P25 and P37.
b. The two USB cables from the USB ports.
4. Cut any cable ties holding the looms in place.
5. Remove the nuts that secure the LCD playbutton assembly to the midtrim and remove the
LCD playbutton assembly
4-21
4.2.11 Pay Panel

The pay panel fits to the top of the lower main door and comes either with coin entry or without
coin entry.

The pay panel with coin entry is a moulded panel that has an allowance for bezels for bank note
and coin entry.
To remove a pay panel with coin entry:
1. Open the lower main door and turn off EGM.

2. Remove the screw that fixes the bank note bezel to the rear of the lower main door.
3. Remove the screw that fixes the printer bezel to the lower main door.
4. Remove the two screws that fix the coin entry blanking plate to the rear of the door.
5. Remove the two screws on the back of the door that secure the playbutton panel. Slide the
mid trim panel forward so that it clears the pay panel.
6. Lift the module and tilt forwards so that it can be lifted off the top of the door.
The pay panel without coin entry consists of a moulded panel that has an allowance for bezels
for bank note and for ticket printer.
To remove a pay panel without coin entry:
1. Open the lower main door and turn off EGM.

2. Remove the screw that fixes the bank note bezel to the rear of the lower main door.
3. Remove the screw that fixes the printer bezel to the lower main door.
4. Remove the two screws on the back of the door that secure the playbutton panel. Slide the
mid trim panel forward so that it clears the pay panel.
5. Lift the module and tilt forwards so that it can be lifted off the top of the door.
Optional Blanking Plates for the Pay Panel

The three pay panel bezels (ticket printer, coin entry and bank note entry) can be converted to
non-operational status by fitting blanking plates. This allows for easy game conversion, if
required. Each of the bezels can be fitted with a dedicated blanking panel that is secured
through the bezel with a screw together with a retaining plate at the rear of the lower main door.
4-22
4.2.12 Coin Tray (if fitted)

The coin tray provides a receptacle for coins or tokens that are dispensed by the EGM or
rejected by the coin handling system. The tray mounts onto the lower section of the door and is
held in position with locating tongues and fasteners attached from the rear.
The stainless steel coin tray liner clips into the plastic outer tray and is then fitted to the door.
Figure 4-11 Coin Tray
VIWSCAB_016
Coin Tray Blanking Panel

A coin tray blanking panel can be fitted for coinless EGMs.
To install the coin tray blanking panel:
2. Remove the coin exit shroud at the top middle area of the coin tray by unscrewing the two
fixing nuts on the inside of the door.
3. Insert the coin tray blanking panel into the coin tray, making sure the two attached bolts fit
through the bolt holes previously used by the coin exit shroud.
4. Fix the blanking plate with two nuts inside the door.
4-23
4.2.13 Cashbox and Chute

Once the hopper is full, coins entered into the EGM are diverted in the cashbox, which is located
inside the cabinet base. Coins enter the cashbox via the cashbox chute located at the bottom of
the cabinet. The chute is moulded from plastic and is clipped into the cabinet base. A door in the
cabinet base provides access to the cashbox to enable coin clearance.

To remove the cashbox chute:
2. The cashbox chute is located on the cabinet base between the legs of the BNA cage.
3. A leg at the front of the cashbox clips into the cabinet. Press on this leg to unlatch the clip
and remove the cashbox.
4.2.14 Main LCD Screen

The main LCD screen is found on the upper main door.

To remove the main LCD screen:
3. Disconnect video and power cables from the LCD screen mounted on the upper main door.
4. Unscrew the screen’s two side trims and remove.
5. Unclip the screen’s monitor mask two clips at the top of the screen and two at the bottom
and remove.
6. Undo the four screws holding the LCD screen to the door frame.
7. Remove the LCD screen.
4-24
4.3 Player Marketing Module (PMM) (if fitted)

EGM models are fitted with a player marketing module (PMM) unit located above the main LCD
screen and between the two speakers. The front of the assembly can be blanked off or
configured with a PMM. The PMM boards are mounted on a plate at the back of the cabinet
behind the PMM.
The PMM can only be accessed by removing the topbox door, which requires opening the lower
main door and upper main door (refer to the Topbox section).
Figure 4-12 Player Marketing Module
1 2
VIWSCAB_002
Legend
1 Speaker (1 each side) 2 PMM Fascia 3 Topbox Door
4-25
4.3.1 General Description

The player marketing module (PMM) provides a range of services for players through a
magnetic stripe card reader, a character display unit and service buttons. Functions are
integrated into the venue head system.
The PMM fitted may be from one of several manufacturers, including Bally, GRIPS, IGT,
Sentinel and Aristocrat™. The following descriptions are based on the Aristocrat PMM. While
the internal components may vary slightly between manufacturers, the functionality of the
devices remains the same. Refer to other manufacturers' manuals for more information.
The player uses a magnetic strip card to communicate with the PMM system. The player inserts
the card into a card reader and the PMM reads the information stored on the card. The host
processor determines who is playing the EGM and sends messages to the player via the PMM
liquid crystal display (LCD). The player communication function allows scope for the marketing
strategies of the venue.
The PMM connects to the venue head system.
4.3.2 Technical Description

A description of the technical details of the Aristocrat PMM follows.
Magnetic Stripe Card Reader

The magnetic stripe card reader is a manual feed Omron type 3S4YR-SBR. The card reader
reads approximately 66% of the magnetic stripe. The reader works with magnetic cards
conforming to AS3522.2 and ISO 2894 and 3554. The magnetic stripe cards used can contain
up to 10 characters of information.
The reader has a minimum life of 300,000 card insertions.
Table 4-1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader Characteristics
Parameter Value
Operating Voltage 5V DC  10%
Current Consumption 25mA max.
Connector IL-10P-S3FP2-1 or equivalent
Effective Stripe Length 46.6mm max.
The magnetic stripe card reader may be located in the PMM module or on the pay panel.
4-26
Liquid Crystal Display

The liquid crystal display (LCD) on the PMM consists of two lines of 16 characters. The
characters appear in silver-grey LCD mode over a yellow-green LED backlight.
Table 4-2 Liquid Crystal Display Characteristics
Parameter Value
Operating Voltage 5 V DC
Current Consumption 2 mA
Connector 14 way header, Molex M6471-14-1 or
equivalent
Service Buttons
The service buttons are made of two pieces: the service button PCB, which includes the switch,
and a plastic push-on cap.
4.3.3 Machine Communications Setup

A setup procedure links the EGM to the host computer network. Details of this setup procedure
are detailed in the venue head system support publications.
The setup involves logging the venue head system communications interface to the host
processor along with the identification number of the EGM, usually located on the upper left side
of the play window, via the PMM.
The service buttons perform dual functions, providing cursor movement and acceptance of
options through the LCD menu when installing the communications interface onto the network.
Figure 4-13 Variation to Face of PMM (Initial Display Message)
1 2 3
Press SETUP to
C
begin INSTALL.. c c$ i
PMM_001
Legend
1 LCD 2 Service Buttons 3 Card Reader
Once the venue head system communications interface is powered on, the player marketing
module will display a series of messages and installation processes are carried out.
4-27
Upon completion of the setup procedure, the EGM becomes functional and a range of player
services and programs are available to EGM players. Also, links are established between the
host computer and components in the EGM which enable security control and EGM monitoring.
NOTE:
The procedure for installing the venue head system communications interface to
the host processor remains the same regardless of the front decal in use. For
example, if the front decal has only one button visible, the other two buttons
function in the manner previously described in this section for installation, even
though they are hidden and not used during normal EGM operation.
4.3.4 Removal and Replacement Procedure

To remove the player marketing module:
1. Disconnect power to the venue head system communications interface.

2. Open the lower main door and switch off EGM power.
4. Lift off the topbox door.
5. Disconnect the looms from the player marketing module and the communications interface.
6. Remove the fascia of the player marketing module by removing the fixing screws.
7. Access the other components of the PMM by releasing the plate at the rear of the cabinet.
This plate is fixed by two screws in the bottom two corners and is hooked into two slots
along the top edge of the plate.
4-28
4.4 Electromechanical Meters (if fitted)

Electromechanical meters are fitted to the EGM and can be viewed when the meter/audit key
switch is turned anticlockwise. These meters form part of the comprehensive security system by
recording the results of EGM cash flow operations.
NOTE:
An EGM configured to use electromechanical meters does not function unless the
meters are connected.
Figure 4-14 Electromechanical Meters
VIWSCAB_049
The electromechanical meter board provides:

 A physical location for up to eight electromechanical meters.
 A physical location for a tamper switch.
 An interface to the meter lights key switch.
4-29
4.5 Topbox
The optional topbox is configured with a casino topbox with LCD screen. The topbox can be
fitted with a topper and a light tower.
4.5.1 Topbox Door

The topbox door allows access to the components within the topbox.

The topbox door is a lift off door. To remove all topbox doors:
3. Push the topbox door up to disengage hooks on the back of the door.
4. Lift off the topbox door.
NOTE:
The upper main door must be open to remove the topbox door.
If a theme is fitted, refer to Appendix A for additional information about removing
and replacing the topbox door.
4-30
4.5.2 Casino Topbox and LCD Screen

This section covers replacement of casino topbox and LCD screen.
Figure 4-15 Casino Topbox and Topper
6 VIWSCAB_007
Legend
1 Topper (if fitted) 3 LCD Screen 5 Speakers (2 off)
2 Topbox Door 4 Player Marketing Module 6 Topbox Locking Tabs
(PMM) (if fitted) (2 off)
4-31

The LCD screen is mounted in the casino topbox and is hinged to the topbox body via two pins.
The topbox is fitted with a spring operated plunger that, when released, allows the LCD screen
to be tilted for easy access to the topbox. A stay keeps the LCD screen in the open position.
Two transit screws (one on each side) are used to fix the LCD screen to the topbox frame and
are required for stability in transport. These screws can be removed after installation, allowing
the plunger to hold the LCD screen in an operational position.
To remove the casino topbox LCD screen:
1. Remove the topbox door as previously described.

2. Remove the screws on either side of the LCD screen.
3. Tilt the LCD screen upwards far enough to allow access to the looms connected to the LCD
screen and disconnect the looms.
4. Unfasten the screw holding the stay to the left side of the LCD screen.
5. Disengage the right side hinge pin from its pin slot by tilting the LCD screen and lifting up on
the right side.
6. Slide the LCD screen to the right side to allow the left side pin to disengage from its
mounting hole.
7. Remove the LCD screen from the EGM.
To remove the casino topbox:

2. Remove the LCD screen as previously described.
3. Remove the four screws (two on each side) that fix the topbox side flange to the cabinet
side flanges.
4. Remove the two angle brackets that clamp the flanges together.
5. Remove the two screws on the rear topbox flange.
6. Lift off the topbox.
4-32
4.5.3 Chop Topbox, Lighting and Artwork (if fitted)

The following section covers removal and replacement procedures for the chop topbox, LED
lighting and artwork.
Figure 4-16 Chop Topbox
1 2
VIWSCAB
_051
Legend
1 Artwork Panel 2 Lighting

To remove the chop topbox:

2. Remove the two screws (one on each side) that fix the cabinet top panel to the flanges on
the cabinet to shelf.
3. Slide the top panel forward to disengage the hooks at the rear.
4. Lift off the top panel.
To remove the chop topbox LED lighting:

2. Undo the screw on each side of the LED assembly.
3. Disconnect the LED assembly loom.
4. Remove the LED assembly and replace with new assembly.
4-33
To remove the chop topbox artwork:

2. Undo 12x screws that secure the supporting bracket at the back of the door.
3. Remove the supporting bracket.
4. Remove the artwork panel.
4.6 Topper (if fitted)

The following section covers topper components, topper wiring and general maintenance of the
topper.
4.6.1 Topper Components

The diagram below shows the topper components.
Figure 4-17 Oval Topper Components
3 4
TOPPER_001
Legend
1 CCFL Lighting Module 3 Topper Door
2 LED Board (4 off) 4 Artwork
4-34
4.6.2 Maintenance
For general maintenance of the topper board:
 Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces.

 Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure.

To remove the topper CCFL:
3. Remove the topbox door.
4. Pull the topper latch to release the topper door.
5. Disconnect the earth braid and PCB loom from the topper door.
6. Lift off the topper door.
7. Disconnect the CCFL loom from where it is mounted on the topper reflector.
8. Remove the topper reflector.
9. Remove the two screws that fix the CCFL inverter cover to the reflector.
10. Open the six clips fixing the CCFL in place and remove the CCFL module.
To remove the topper fuse:
3. Locate the topper loom. The fuse is part of the loom and is usually found hanging at the
rear of the cabinet above the power supply unit.
4. Open the fuse holder and remove the fuse.
NOTE:
Make sure that the new fuse has the same current rating as the one being
removed.
4-35
4.7 Wing Lighting

Wing lighting is incorporated into the side wings of the cabinet.
The wing lighting driver board controls the wing lighting assemblies, which are flexible strips of
multiple RGB LEDs. These strips are attached to the cabinet using double-sided tape..
The illustration below shows the wiring of the EGM lighting.
Figure 4-18 Cabinet Lighting
3 5
1 6
VIWSWIRING_001
Legend
1 Wing Lighting 4 Topper with CCFL Lighting 7 Belly Door LED
Lighting Board
2 Backplane Board 5 RS232 Communications
Board
3 Wing Lighting Driver 6 Wing Lighting
Board
4-36
4.8 Light Tower (if fitted)

The light tower provides an additional level of security and customer service. The light tower is
fixed to the roof of the topbox or top of the topper. Light towers are available with two, three or
four tiers. The tiers of the light tower illuminate in response to player requests through the
playbuttons (service, reserve, etc.) or EGM conditions (door open, jackpot, etc.). The colour of
the light tower tiers and the corresponding messages and functions may vary from venue to
venue. Refer to the Machine Modes chapter for a description of the light tower messages.
Figure 4-19 Light Tower
VIWSLTOWER_001
A DIP switch at the base of the light tower board is used to set the number of tiers (two, three or
four) and is used to cater for different customer requirements.
On four-tier light towers, each set of lights has a coloured plastic segment around it. On three-
tier light towers, the middle two sets of lights are combined. On two-tier light towers, the top two
sets and the bottom two sets of lights are combined.
The light tower may be disassembled in place or removed from the topbox as a single unit.
4-37
4.8.1 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure

To disassemble the light tower and replace components:
2. Note the position and colour of each tier.
3. Remove the screw fastening the light tower cap and remove the cap.
4. Remove and replace the individual segments as required.
5. Replace the light tower cap and screw and fasten the assembly together.
6. Switch on the EGM, close and lock the lower main door and check that the light tower is
functioning correctly.

To remove the light tower assembly:
3. Lift off the topbox door or topper door.
4. Unplug the loom from the hanging connector at the bottom of the light tower.
5. Remove the two nuts securing the light tower to the topbox.
6. Remove the light tower from the roof of the topbox.
4-38
4.9 Audio System

The audio system provides music and sound effects that correspond to the game(s) on the
EGM.
4.9.1 Audio Setup

The audio system has two standard speakers, a large amplifier unit and a woofer speaker on the
left wall on the inside of the EGM.
Figure 4-20 Standard Speakers, Woofer and Large Amplifier
B_017
VIWSCA
Legend
1 Standard Speakers 2 Large Amplifier Unit 3 Woofer
4-39
4.9.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures

To remove standard speakers:
2. Open the upper main door by pulling the lever.
3. Open the topbox door.
4. Remove the screws at the front that holds the speaker assembly in position.
5. Push speaker assembly towards the back of the cabinet until its fixing hook is released and
it falls out of the fixing slots.
6. Remove loom from rear of speaker assembly.
7. Pull out from cabinet.
The woofer speaker is fixed to a circular bracket with four screws, which is fixed to the side of
the cabinet.
To remove a woofer speaker from the cabinet:
1. Remove bank note acceptor and bank note acceptor cage (if fitted) (refer to the Bank Note
Acceptor Cage section).
2. Disconnect the speaker loom.
3. Undo the four screws holding the woofer speaker to the bracket.
To remove the amplifier with plate attached:
1. Open the lower main door using the main door key and switch off mains power.
2. Open the upper main door by pulling the lever.
3. Remove the bank note acceptor and the bank note acceptor cage (if fitted) (refer to the
Bank Note Acceptor Cage section).
4. Remove the screws on the front and back of the plate.
5. Remove any attached cables.
6. Remove the amplifier with plate attached.
To remove the amplifier from the plate:
1. Remove the four screws holding the amplifier to the plate.

2. Remove the amplifier from plate.
4-40
4.10 Bank Note Acceptor Cage (if fitted)

The bank note acceptor is located in a steel cage assembly on the right side of the cabinet.
4.10.1 Maintenance
To remove the cage assembly:
2. Remove the plastic coin chute (if fitted) underneath the cage assembly.
3. Unlock the stacker lock(s) and fully open the stacker door.
4. Remove the screw from the top of the BNA cage assembly.
5. Pull up and hold the two lower latch bars located at the front of the BNA cage assembly.
6. Slide the assembly toward you and out of the frame.
4-41
Figure 4-21 Cage Housing and BNA Access
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
BNA_007
Legend
1 Dual Cage Assembly 4 Bank Note Stacker 7 Lower Latch
(Behind security plate)
2 Bank Note Acceptor 5 Stacker Locks 8 Pin
3 LED Function Indicators 6 Stacker Cage Door
(Bezel)
NOTE:
The above illustration shows two stacker locks. Some jurisdictions only require a
single lock.
4-42
4.11 Maintenance
General maintenance ensures that the EGM stays in operational order. If maintenance tasks are
not performed regularly, the EGM could perform poorly.
To maintain the EGM:
 Check that all cabinet earth leads are in good condition and securely connected.
 Check the condition of the artwork panels. Replace if necessary.
 Check that the EGM security features (e.g. cabinet door security switch) are functioning
correctly and are not damaged.
 Check the lighting system works correctly. Replace any faulty components.
 Check that all playbuttons function correctly. Replace if necessary.
 Check that there are no foreign objects in any of the security locks.
 Check that all doors and latches close and lock correctly. Adjust if necessary.
Clean the exterior of the cabinet with a damp cloth using dishwashing soap and water in a mild
concentration. Remove any residue with clean water and a damp cloth. Be extremely careful not
to allow water to seep into the EGM and electrical components.
Do not use aggressive solvents, alkaline solutions or abrasive cleaners.
4-43
Notes
4-44
Service Manual Power Supply
Chapter 5
Power Supply
5.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Technical Description .............................................................................. 5-4

5.2.1 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Input Functional Specifications .............................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3 Output Functional Specifications............................................................................ 5-8
5.2.4 Connectors ........................................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.5 Operating and Storage Environment ................................................................... 5-15
5.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 5-16

5.3.1 Fuses .................................................................................................................... 5-16
5-1
Power Supply Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Unit - Front .................................................................................................. 5-4

Figure 5-2 Power Supply Unit - Back................................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Unit - Block Diagram ................................................................................... 5-6
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Basic Operation ................................................................................................................... 5-6
Table 5-2 AC Input Line Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-7
Table 5-3 AC Outputs.......................................................................................................................... 5-8
Table 5-4 DC Output Voltage Regulation ............................................................................................ 5-8
Table 5-5 DC Output Currents............................................................................................................. 5-9
Table 5-6 DC Output Transient Step Sizes ......................................................................................... 5-9
Table 5-7 DC Output Ripple and Noise ............................................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-8 Output Capacitive Loads ................................................................................................... 5-10
Table 5-9 PWR_FAILn Voltage Levels .............................................................................................. 5-11
Table 5-10 PS_ONn Signal Characteristics....................................................................................... 5-11
Table 5-11 24VF_OFFn Voltage Levels ............................................................................................ 5-11
Table 5-12 Power Supply Timing ...................................................................................................... 5-12
Table 5-13 DC Output Over Voltage Limits ....................................................................................... 5-13
Table 5-14 Overload Limits ............................................................................................................... 5-13
Table 5-15 AC Connectors ................................................................................................................ 5-14
Table 5-16 DC Outputs Connector Pin Assignment .......................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-17 Operating Environment ................................................................................................... 5-15

Table 5-18 Storage Environment....................................................................................................... 5-15
5-2
5.1 Overview
The power supply unit (PSU) supplies power to components and devices in the electronic
gaming machine (EGM), filters electromagnetic interference (EMI) and protects EGM
components from adverse input disturbances such as lightning and voltage fluctuation. The PSU
provides DC outputs to power electronics and associated gaming peripherals.
A standard IEC socket connects the PSU to the AC mains input. A wide range of mains voltage
(100-240V AC) can be connected without switch selection. PSU specifications, excluding
equipment connected to auxiliary outlets) are shown below.
Table 5-1 Specification Summary
Specification
Voltage range 100V AC - 240V AC
Voltage frequency 47Hz - 63Hz
AC input current (rated) <10A (115V AC) <5A (230V AC)
Efficiency >75% @ 230V AC, full and typical load
PFC type Active PFC
Power factor >0.95
Inrush current limit <20A
Table 5-2 DC Outputs
Output Regulation Ripple and Output Load Range

Range Noise Spec Imin Imax
+12.3V ±2.5% 120mV 0.5A 10A
+24V combined ±2.5% 200mV 0.5A 11A
+5V SB ±5% 50mV 0.0A 2.0A
PSU features include:
 Over voltage protection.

 Under voltage protection.
 Over current protection.
 Over temperature protection.
 Short circuit protection.
 Two GPO mains outlets.
 Low leakage current.
5-3
5.2 Technical Description

The PSU is mounted to the bottom of the EGM cabinet. It has convection cooling airflow intake
along the back. The mounted PSU is fully enclosed with venting holes that comply with safety
standards. The enclosure also meets fire safety standards.
The dimensions are 83mm (3.27") wide by 200mm (7.87") high by 300mm (11.81") deep. The
PSU is held in place with locating slots and tabs at the bottom, and is screwed in place at the
top. The cabinet has been designed to guide natural airflow over the heat sink at the rear of the
PSU.
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Unit - Front
PS
6
U_ 0
01
Legend
1 Main Power Switch 4 GPO (unswitched) 7 Cooling Fan
2 GPO Power Switch 5 GPO (switched)
3 Fuse 6 Power Input
5-4
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Unit - Back
6
PS
U_
00
2
Legend
1 Locating Slots (2 off) 3 DC Outputs 5 Mounting Tabs (2 off)
2 Locating Tab 4 Fixing Holes (2 off) 6 Heat Sink
5-5
5.2.1 Basic Operation

The figure and the table below provide a detailed explanation of the PSU’s basic operation.
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Unit - Block Diagram
(8) (9)
GPO 1 GPO 1
Switch Output
(11)
(1) (2) GPO 2
Mains Input EMC Filter Output
(10) (5) (6) (12)

(4)
Fuse AC/DC Supply DC
PFC
Converter Control Connectors
(3)
Main
Switch
PSU_003
Table 5-3 Basic Operation
Ref. No Function
1 Mains power supply.
2 The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) filter maintains EMC and low leakage
current, and filters the mains supply. Two main general purpose outlets (GPOs)
are available for internal peripheral mains input.
3 The main switch position determines whether power is supplied to EGM
components (except for the GPO 1 output).
4 The power factor correction (PFC) module guarantees harmonic limits
compliance and worldwide ranging mains input capability.
5 The AC/DC converter supplies low-voltage output for EGM components with low-
voltage requirements.
6 The supply control circuitry distributes power to the DC connectors.
7 GPO 1 output protection fuse.
8 GPO 1 output switch.
9 GPO 1 output independent from main switch.
10 GPO 2 output protection fuse.
11 GPO 2 output dependent on main switch.
12 DC connector power supply to the EGM components.
5-6
5.2.2 Input Functional Specifications

The table below lists AC input voltage and frequency requirements for uninterrupted operation.
The power supply is capable of supplying full-rated output power over a wide input voltage
range, can automatically recover from AC power loss and can start up under peak loading at
90V AC.
Table 5-4 AC Input Line Requirements
Parameter Minimum Maximum Unit

Vin 90 264 VAC rms
Vin Frequency 47 63 Hz
To meet the EMC requirements an active power factor corrected input stage is used. The power
supply automatically recovers from any brownout condition.
Inrush Current Limiting

The maximum inrush when the PSU is turned on is limited to less than any excluding equipment
associated with mains GPO when the power is turned on at either 115V AC and 230V AC at any
point of the AC cycle. It excludes transient current due to EMI suppression capacitors. The
inrush applies to both cold and hot starting conditions.
Input Under Voltage

The power supply contains protection circuitry in case of potential damage caused by the
application of an input voltage below the minimum specified.
Input Over Current Protection

The power supply incorporates primary fusing for input over current protection to prevent
damage to the power supply and to meet safety requirements. Fuses are the slow-blow type or
equivalent to prevent nuisance trips. Fuses cannot be accessed or serviced by operators.
Input Leakage Current

Maximum leakage current from the power supply (excluding equipment associated with mains
GPO outlets) is less than 400µA at 120V AC.
5-7
5.2.3 Output Functional Specifications

The following section outlines the output specifications for the PSU.
AC Outputs
GPO outputs are used to power mains associated equipment within the EGM. Outputs are
filtered to protect against conducted EMI from the connected devices and also to provide
immunity from mains disturbances for the connected devices.
Table 5-5 AC Outputs
Output Controlled by… Maximum Rating Load Regulation

GPO1 A single pole switch located 1A Better than 1% at
adjacent to the output max. load
GPO2 The mains power switch 1A Better than 1% at
max. load
The GPO outputs are protected against over current by means of a fuse. To allow for the inrush
current associated with the peripherals used, a slow fuse is used, rated at 3.15A. The fuse
holders are located adjacent to the outputs and are externally accessible.
DC Outputs
DC outputs provide power to components that require DC voltage.
DC Voltage Regulation
The DC output voltages are within the regulation ranges shown in the table below. Voltages are
measured at the output connectors under all line, load and environmental conditions.
Table 5-6 DC Output Voltage Regulation
Output Tolerance Min. Nom. Max.

+12VDC ± 2.5% 12.00 12.30 12.60
+5VSB ± 5% 4.75 5.00 5.25
+24V1DC ± 2.5 % 23.4 24.0 24.6
+24V2DC ± 2.5 % 23.4 24.0 24.6
The DC rail +24V1DC are used as a distributed rail for supplying EGM peripherals.
The +24V2DC output is used for lighting. It is derived directly from the +24V1DC output.
+24V2DC has an inhibit control input.
5-8
DC Output Currents
The output current capability of individual DC rails is defined in the table below. Peak rating
describes short current demands of peripherals when in the active state.
Table 5-7 DC Output Currents
Output Min Max Peak

+12VDC 0.5 10A 15A
+5VSB 0 2A 3A
+24V1DC 0.5 6.5A 11.5A
+24V2DC 20 4.5A 7.1A
If +24V1DC is not being used, then the extra power is available from +24V2DC.
Output Transient Response

The table below summarises the expected output transient step sizes for each output.
Table 5-8 DC Output Transient Step Sizes
Output Maximum Step Size Maximum Transient Load

(% of rated output amps) Slew Rates3 (A/μs)
+12VDC 40% 1.0
+5VSB 0.5A Not specified
+24V1DC 40% 1.0
+24V2DC 50% 1.0
Efficiency
The power supply is at least 75% efficient under load conditions greater than 50% of nominal. In
standby mode, the efficiency of the power supply is greater than 50% when the 5VSB current is
greater than 1A.
The power supply is designed for low standby power. When in standby mode, the power supply
is at least 50% efficient. Standby efficiency is measured with the DC outputs off and PS_ONn in
active state.
5-9
Voltage Ripple and Noise

The output ripple/noise requirements listed in the table below are met throughout the load
ranges specified in the table below and under all input voltage conditions.
Table 5-9 DC Output Ripple and Noise
Output Max. Ripple and Noise (mVpp)

+12VDC 120
+5VSB 50
+24V1DC 200
+24V2DC 200
Capacitive Loads
The power supply powers up and operates with the following maximum capacitive loads
simultaneously present on DC outputs.
Table 5-10 Output Capacitive Loads
Output Capacitive Load (uF)

+12VDC 10,000
+5VSB 500
+24V1DC 10,000
+24V2DC 4,000
Closed-loop Stability
The power supply is unconditionally stable under all line/load/transient load conditions including
capacitive loads. A minimum of 45 degrees phase margin and 10dB gain margin is supplied at
both the maximum and minimum loads.
Power Sequencing
The +24V1DC and +12VDC rails track each other on power-up and on power-down. +24V1DC
output level is equal to or greater than the +12VDC output at all times.
Voltage Hold-up Time

The power supply is designed with a high susceptibility to mains disturbance. It must maintain
output despite a loss of input power at the low-end nominal range (115V AC/47Hz or 230V
AC/47Hz) at maximum continuous output load as applicable for a minimum combined time of
45ms.
5-10
PWR_FAILn
The PWR_FAILn is an active-low signal that provides a warning to the EGM of mains failure.
When input mains rectified voltage falls below a threshold indicating insufficient level of energy,
the PWR_FAILn signal is activated.
Minimum duration of PWR_FAILn activity is longer than 5ms to provide sufficient time for
detection.
Table 5-11 PWR_FAILn Voltage Levels
Signal Voltage
PWR_FAILn active <0.4V @ 5mA
PWR_FAILn inactive >6V
PS_ONn
PS_ONn is an active-low, TTL-compatible signal that allows Gen7 electronics to remotely
control the power supply for wake on LAN (WOL). When PS_ONn is pulled to TTL low, the
power supply turns on +12VDC and +24V1DC. When PS_ONn is pulled to TTL high or open-
circuited, the DC output rails do not deliver current and are held at zero potential with respect to
ground.
PS_ONn has no effect on the +5VSB output, which is always enabled whenever the AC power
is present.
Table 5-12 PS_ONn Signal Characteristics
Signal Voltage
PS_ONn active <0.8V @ -1.6mA
PS_ONn inactive 2 - 5.25V @ -200uA
24V2_OFFn
24V2_OFFn is a current limiting device supplying 24V2DC and providing switch capability.
24V2_OFFn is driven by an active-low, open collector signal from the Gen7 electronics to
remotely control the 24V2DC rail. When 24V2_OFFn is pulled to low state, the power supply
turns off +24V2DC and the rail is held at zero potential.
Table 5-13 24VF_OFFn Voltage Levels
Signal Voltage and Current

24VF_OFFn active <0.4V @ 5mA
24VF_OFFn inactive >6V
5-11
+5VSB
+5VSB is a standby supply output that is active whenever AC power is present and the main
switch is on. This standby 5V provides a power source for circuits that must remain operational
when other DC output rails are in a disabled state. Over current protection is provided on the
+5VSB output.
Power-On Time
The power-on time is the time from when PS_ONn is pulled low to when the +12VDC and
+24V1DC outputs are within the regulation ranges.
The power-on time is defined as T1 in the table below. +5VSB has a power-on time of two
seconds maximum after application of valid AC voltages.
Table 5-14 Power Supply Timing
Parameter Description Value

T1 Power on time <500ms
T2 Power rails rise time 2 - 20ms
T3 PWR_FAILn delay 5 - 500ms
T4 PWR_FAILn rise/ fall times 50 - 200us
T5 Hold up time to PWR_FAILn active >20ms
T6 Power fail warning >25ms
Rise Time
The output voltages will raise to the regulation ranges within T2 as defined in the power supply
timing table. There is a smooth and continuous ramp of each DC output voltage from 10% to
90% of its final set point within the regulation band.
Overshoot at Turn-on/Turn-off
The output voltage overshoot upon the application or removal of the input voltage or the
assertion/deassertion of PS_ONn is less than 10% the nominal voltage.
Reset after Shutdown

If the power supply latches into a shutdown state because of a fault condition on its outputs, the
power supply returns to normal operation only after the fault has been removed and either the
PSON signal is cycled or the main power supply switch has been turned off/on with a minimum
off time of three seconds.
+5VSB at AC Power-Down
After AC power is removed, the +5VSB standby voltage output will remain at its steady state
value for the minimum hold-up time specified in voltage holdup time until the output begins to
decrease in voltage.
5-12
Output Protection
The power supply unit includes measures to protect EGM components from events such as
power surges and power failures.
Over Voltage Protection

The over voltage sense circuitry and reference reside in devices that are separate and distinct
from the regulator control circuitry and reference to prevent a single failure point.
Over voltage protection behaves such that:
 Over voltage on +24V or +12V will cause latched shutdown of +24V and +12V.
 Over voltage on +5VSB will shutdown all outputs (non-latched) and the +5VSB will auto-
recover.
Table 5-15 DC Output Over Voltage Limits
Over Voltage Trip Limits

Output
Min Max
+12VDC 13.4 15.6
+5VSB 5.74 7.0
+24V1DC 25.5 29
Overload and Short Circuit Protection

All outputs are electronically overload and short circuit protected.
Overload and short circuit protection behaves such that:
 An overload or short circuit on either the +24V or +12V causes a latched shutdown of the
+12V and +24V rails.
 An overload or short circuit on the +5VSB causes a non-latched shutdown of all rails and
the +5VSB recovers once the fault condition has passed.
 An overload or short circuit between the +12V and the +24V rails causes a latched
shutdown of the +12V and +24V rails.
 A short circuit occurring between the +5VSB and either the +12V or the +24V causes a
non-latched shutdown of all rails. The +5VSB will recover once the fault condition has
passed.
The power supply is capable of withstanding a continuous short-circuit to the output without
damage or overstress to the unit. Limits for overload are given in the table below. An overload or
short circuit must be present for 50 to 100ms before the outputs are shut down.
Table 5-16 Overload Limits
Output Over Current Limits

+12V1DC 16 - 18A
+5VSB 3.0 - 3.5A
+24V1DC 19 - 21A
+24V2DC 8 - 10A
5-13
No-Load Operation
No damage or hazardous condition should occur with all the DC output connectors disconnected
from the load. The power supply may latch into the shutdown state.
Over Temperature Protection

The power supply includes an over temperature protection sensor that will trip and shutdown the
power supply at a preset temperature point. Such an overheated condition is typically the result
of internal current overloading or a cooling fan failure. The PWR_FAILn signal is initiated before
the PSU thermally shuts down.
5.2.4 Connectors
The following tables detail the connectors for the power supply.
Table 5-17 AC Connectors
Mains Input
Function AC input
Type Male IEC 320
GPO Outputs
Function AC output
Type Female IEC 320
Fuse Holders
Type Half-twist bayonet
Size 3AG
Mains Switch
Type Dual pole
Voltage 120V to 240V
5-14
DC signals are connected via a cable loom that has a 24 pin Molex mini-fit junior connector on
it.
Table 5-18 DC Outputs Connector Pin Assignment
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 13 GND
2 GND 14 GND
3 +24V1 15 +24V1
4 +24V1 16 +24V1
5 +24V2 17 GND
6 +24V2 18 +5VSB
7 PS_ONn 19 --
8 24V2_OFFn 20 PWR_FAILn
9 12V 21 +12V
10 12V 22 +12V
11 GND 23 GND
12 GND 24 GND
5.2.5 Operating and Storage Environment

The following tables detail the optimum operating and storage environment for the PSU.
Conditions outside of these ranges may damage the PSU.
Table 5-19 Operating Environment
Condition Range
Temperature 0°C (32°F) to +40°C (104°F)
Humidity ≤85% RH non-condensing
Altitude 3000m (9842.49')
Table 5-20 Storage Environment
Condition Range
Temperature -40°C (-40°F) to +70°C (158°F)
Humidity ≤95% RH non-condensing
Altitude 15000m (49212.45')
5-15
5.3 Maintenance
The following maintenance procedures may need to be carried out on the power supply.
5.3.1 Fuses
The switched mode power supply fuse is an internal non-serviceable component. If this fuse is
blown, the power supply unit must be shipped to the manufacturer for service (contact your
service organisation). Non-switched fuses are externally accessible and can be replaced as
shown in the procedure below.
WARNING:
AC mains voltage is present in the power supply unit even when the EGM is
switched off. The mains input cable must be unplugged before attempting to
replace a fuse.

To replace the externally accessible power outlet fuses:
1. Open door(s) as required and switch off the mains switch and the auxiliary power switch.
2. If fitted, remove the hopper to access the power supply unit.
3. Unplug all mains cables from the power supply unit.
4. Remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder by turning it anticlockwise. The fuse springs out
of the holder.
5. Remove the blown fuse and insert the new fuse into the cap. Insert the fuse cap into the
holder, screwing it in a clockwise direction. Take care not to over-tighten.
6. Replace the mains cables.
7. Switch on the mains switch and the auxiliary power switch. Check that both the main screen
and the auxiliary mains have power. Close and lock the door(s).
WARNING:
AC mains voltage is present in the power supply unit even when the EGM is
switched off. The mains input cable must be unplugged before attempting to
remove the power supply unit.
5-16
To remove the power supply from the EGM:
1. Open the door(s) and switch off the mains switch and the auxiliary power switch.
2. Remove the hopper (if fitted) to gain access to the power supply unit.
3. Unplug all mains cables from the power supply unit.
4. Unplug all other looms and connectors from the power supply unit.
5. Unscrew the fasteners that secure the power supply unit to the cabinet.
6. Remove the power supply from the cabinet.
CAUTION:
Run a complete EGM test after replacing the power supply unit or any power
supply component.
5-17
Notes
5-18
Service Manual Coin Handling Assembly
Chapter 6
Coin Handling Assembly

6.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Coin Validators......................................................................................... 6-3

6.2.1 Condor Coin Validator (if fitted) .............................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator (if fitted) .................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor ........................................... 6-6
6.4 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 6-6

6.4.1 Coin Validator ......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.2 Coin Chute Assembly ............................................................................................. 6-7
6.4.3 Diverter Solenoid .................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.4 Photo-optic Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-7
6-1
Coin Handling Assembly Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Validator ........................................................................................................ 6-4

Figure 6-2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator............................................................................................... 6-5
List of Tables
Table 6-1 Recommended Power Supply ............................................................................................. 6-6
6-2
6.1 Overview
The coin handling system verifies coins and directs valid coins to the hopper or cashbox and
invalid coins to the coin tray. It is fitted and configured at the factory to suit a specific coin
denomination or token and consists of:
 A coin entry.
 A coin validator.
 A coin diverter.
 Coin chuting.
 A photo-optic module.
The coin entry is located above the mid trim on the pay panel. It ensures that coins are directed
into the validator. Only configured coin denominations are accepted by the validator. Accepted
coins are directed to the accept chute and rejected coins are directed to the coin tray via the
reject chute. Oversized or bent coins are rejected.
The coin validator works by comparing the properties of inserted coins to preset limits stored in
the validator software. When coins pass through the validator, signals are sent to the carrier
board to update the credit meters.
The coin validator, diverter solenoid and coin chuting are mounted on the inside of the door.
6.2 Coin Validators

Coin validators verify that currency is valid and send the value to the EGM to register as credits.
Coin validators use a standard casino parallel protocol to communicate with the EGM. The
validator connects to the backplane board. There is a provision to use the ccTalk protocol if
needed.
6.2.1 Condor Coin Validator (if fitted)

The Condor coin validator is pre-programmed to accept a specific coin type. Once the coin is in
the validator, it passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter, thickness and magnetic
properties. This allows the validator to accurately discriminate between different coins.
6-3
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Validator
COI
N_0
0 1
6
Legend
1 Debris Flap 3 Locating Pin (4 off) 5 Rejected Coins Exit
2 Coin Entry 4 Connector for Loom to 6 Accepted Coins Exit
EGM
Basic Operation
The validator uses both inductive and optical sensors for coin validation. When a coin passes
the inductive sensors, which are located on either side of the coin path, the resulting signal
change is checked by a microcontroller. The optical sensors measure the coin diameter using
infrared beams.
Accepted coins are directed to the hopper or the cashbox, depending on whether or not the
hopper is full. If no hopper is fitted, coins are always directed to the cashbox.
If the validator detects a coin moving in the wrong direction (yoyo) or a failed or blocked credit or
reject optic, an alarm is generated. Upon receiving the alarm signal, a fault message displays on
the screen and the EGM locks up.
If the validator detects a problem, the LED flashes red continuously and the validator does not
accept any coins until power is removed and the fault condition corrected. Do not remove the
unit from the EGM to perform a coin acceptance test, as this may cause a high rejection rate.
6-4
6.2.2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator (if fitted)

The Microcoin QL is a high speed coin validator.
Figure 6-2 Microcoin QL Coin Validator
3 4 5
COIN_002
8 7
Legend
1 Connector for Loom to 4 Debris Flap 7 Rejected Coins Exit
EGM
2 Debris Flap Hinge 5 Locating Pin (4 off) 8 Accepted Coins Exit
3 Coin Entry 6 Accept Gate Solenoid
Basic Operation
The Microcoin QL coin validator uses a proprietary technique to recognise and validate different
coins.
The coin path in the Microcoin QL is designed to prevent coin jams. The coin maintains contact
with the control surface as it travels through the acceptor.
The validator contains a metal anti-stringing gate to prevent yoyo attempts. It offers both
mechanical and electronic security measures to counter fraudulent activities.
6-5
Table 6-1 Recommended Power Supply
Description
Voltage Range +11.5 to +15V DC
Quiescent current 100mA
Peak Current 450mA @ 11.5V DC
550mA @ 15V DC
6.3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor

The diverter solenoid and the photo-optic sensor are mounted at the back of the coin handling
assembly.
The diverter solenoid is mechanically linked to the coin diverter in the coin chute assembly.
When there is no power to the solenoid, valid coins fall into the hopper. When power is applied
to the solenoid, the diverter redirects valid coins to the cashbox.
The photo-optic sensor monitors the position of the diverter solenoid. This enables the EGM
software to monitor the destination of accepted coins. If the EGM software detects that five
consecutive coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cashbox or vice versa, the EGM
locks up with the fault message Coin Diverter Fault.
6.4 Maintenance
The following procedures are used to maintain the coin handling system.
6.4.1 Coin Validator

To clean the coin validator, open the debris flap and clean the coin path using canned air, a
clean dry cloth or a soft long-bristled paintbrush.
Removing Coin Jams

If a coin jam occurs:
1. Open the main door and switch off the EGM.

2. Pull open the debris flap to access the coin path.
3. Clear any coin jams or other foreign objects from the path.
4. Close the debris flap. Switch on the EGM and close the lower main door.
Coins are now able to pass through the coin path.
6-6

To remove the coin validator:
2. Carefully unplug the loom from the validator to the backplane board. Do not pull on the
wires.
3. Push the validator upwards to the top of the locating groove so that the bottom of the
assembly comes free.
4. Swing the bottom of the validator outwards.
5. Pull the validator down and clear of the coin handling assembly.
6.4.2 Coin Chute Assembly

To check and clean the coin chute assembly:
 Check that all assembly bolts and nuts are tight.

 Clean the coin chuting with a clean dry cloth or a soft long-bristled paintbrush.
6.4.3 Diverter Solenoid

The following procedure is used to remove the diverter solenoid.

To remove the diverter solenoid:
3. Unplug the loom from the bottom of the diverter solenoid. Do not pull on the wires.
4. Unplug the loom on the back of the main door. Do not pull on the wires.
5. Remove the split pin or screw from the bottom of the plunger. Take care to retain the
spring.
6. Release the solenoid by unscrewing the two screws on the right of the unit.
7. If required, pull the plate out from retaining clip at the right and clear of the assembly.
6.4.4 Photo-optic Sensor

To check and clean the photo-optic sensor:
 Remove the photo-optic sensor and clean the photo-optic detector and LED face with a
clean dry cloth or a soft long-bristled paintbrush.
 Check that the photo-optic sensor is seated correctly.
 Check that the loom sockets are secure.
6-7
Notes
6-8
Service Manual Hopper
Chapter 7
Hopper
7.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper ......................................................... 7-4

7.2.1 Motor Control.......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Coin Counting......................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Electrical Connection and Interface ....................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 7-8

7.3.1 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................................................ 7-8
7.3.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 7-9
7-1
Hopper Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper ..................................................................................... 7-4

Figure 7-2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper - Rear View ................................................................. 7-5
List of Tables
Table 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper Motor Control ............................................................... 7-6
Table 7-2 Electrical Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 7-7
7-2
7.1 Overview
Accepted coins are directed through the coin handling assembly to the hopper or to the cashbox
when the hopper is full. When Collect is pressed and there are credits on the EGM, the hopper
dispenses coins into the coin tray via the coin exit chute.
The hopper can pay out any number of coins above the coin/token value and below the hopper
collect limit (the maximum value of coins that can be paid from the hopper). The token value and
the hopper collect limit are set in the relevant audit screen.
If the number of credits is greater than the collect limit and Collect is pressed the EGM locks up,
the credits are paid as a book pay and the EGM is reset using the reset key.
If Collect is pressed when the value of the credits is less then the hopper collect limit but greater
than the number of coins available in the hopper, all coins in the hopper are dispensed before
the EGM locks up. The hopper must be refilled and the EGM reset before the balance of the
coins is dispensed. If too many or too few coins are dispensed, the EGM locks up.
7-3
7.2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper

The Medium Capacity Cyclone hopper (MCCH) is a modular disc-based hopper that is
microprocessor driven.
The hopper accepts coins via the coin chute in the hopper cover. A hopper level probe is used
to indicate the holding capacity which can be varied in steps of approximately 100 coins.
The hopper has a payout rate of approximately eight to ten coins per second in stream mode.
The hopper uses a rotating disc to pick up the coins from the hopper bowl and transports them
to the coin exit position, where spring-loaded fingers pay the coins out from the coin exit in an
upward direction. Automatic jam detection and clearing feature minimises the need for attention.
Swapping the interchangeable disc enables the MCCH to dispense differently sized coins or
tokens.
Figure 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper
3
HO
P_ 0
02
Legend
1 Coin Entry 3 Plastic Lever (2 off)
2 Coin Chute 4 Hopper Release Catch
7-4
Figure 7-2 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper - Rear View
HOP_003
Legend
1 Interchangeable 2 Coin Level Metal 3 Mating Connector
Rotating Disk Sensing Plate
Each disc contains holes in which the coins are held in short stacks. The motor drives the disc
via a gear train. As the disc rotates, the coins at the bottom of each stack make contact with the
ejector fingers and push the spring-loaded fingers back. Further disc rotation causes the coin to
move into the exit slot. At this point, the spring pulls the ejector fingers forward and pushes the
coin through the exit slot.
As they exit, coins interrupt the light beam that is routed across the exit window via a clear
plastic light guide. This causes a coin output signal to be sent to the EGM.
7-5
7.2.1 Motor Control

The motor is controlled by an H-bridge circuit that enables it to run either forwards or backwards.
Outputs from the microcontroller can set the motor into one of three states as shown in the table
below.
Table 7-1 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper Motor Control
Motor Condition Motor +ve Terminal Motor -ve Terminal
Stop/Brake 0V 0V
Forward 24V 0V
Reverse 0V 24V
Motor Start-Up
When the control input signal is activated, the motor is set to run forwards if the light guide is not
blocked. The motor is stopped if the control input signal is deactivated or the light guide
becomes blocked.
Automatic Coin Jam Detection and Clearing

The current drawn by the motor is continuously monitored while the motor is running in order to
detect jams. The readings are disregarded for the first 50ms after the motor has been switched
on to prevent the initial current surge from being interpreted as a jam.
When the motor is running forward and the current has exceeded the jam threshold for at least
50ms, the controller assumes a jam has occurred. The automatic clearing sequence activates:
1. A brake on the motor is applied for 50ms.

2. The motor is run in reverse for 200ms.
3. A brake on the motor is applied for 50ms.
The motor then resumes running forwards, assuming the start-up conditions are still valid.
Motor Protection
A thermal cut-out is placed in series with the motor so as to prevent damage to the hopper in the
event of an overcurrent condition.
7-6
7.2.2 Coin Counting

The optical counting system includes a light guide, LEDs and photo-transistors mounted at the
coin exit. The devices generate beams of light across the coin path. When a coin exits the
hopper, it breaks one or more of the light beams and changes the state of the photo-transistor
output.
Light Guide Blockage

If the microcontroller detects that the light guide has remained blocked for a preset maximum
time, the motor stops or does not start. The motor does not run again until the blockage is
cleared.
Level Sensing
A round level plate mounted inside the hopper bowl and a metal strip fixed to the outside of the
bowl and the bowl extension provide a single high level sense output. The strip is connected to
0V and the round plate is wired to the main connector. A screw is inserted through the metal
strip and the bowl extension wall. This provides an electrical connection between the plate and
strip if the coins are at the appropriate level.
Several mounting positions are available for screws to enable the high level sensor to be set in
steps.
7.2.3 Electrical Connection and Interface

Connection to the hopper is with a 12-way AMP metrimate connector. The pinout is detailed in
the table below.
Table 7-2 Electrical Interfaces
Seq No. Type Description

1 Power Supply Voltage - 19 to 26V DC
Current empty - 300mA typical
Full - 1.0A typical
Switch-on - 2.5A peak
Reversing - 2.5A peak
2 Count Output - Active Coin present voltage - 0.8V max.
Low Current - 30mA max.
No coin voltage - 30V max.
3 MOTOR_ON Input Inactive, motor stopped. 7.0V min. at 1mA.
Internal Pull-ups to 15.0V max.
Supply Voltage Active, motor running. 2.2V max. at 1mA.
7-7
7.3 Maintenance
The following procedures are used to maintain the hopper.

The hopper fits into the base of the EGM.
To remove the hopper from the cabinet:
2. Push the hopper release catch on the hopper base and slide the hopper out of the EGM,
using the handle of the hopper.
3. Lift the hopper using the handle and remove it from the EGM.
Replacement is reversal of the removal procedure.
To remove and replace the coin ejector fingers (to be performed every 500,000 coins):
1. Remove the hopper.

2. Remove the hopper cover.
3. Remove all the coins from the hopper.
4. Remove the bowl extension and bowl.
5. Remove the rotating disc by removing the screw from the middle of the rotating disc
assembly.
6. Remove the upper base by pulling the two plastic levers outwards and gently pushing the
upper base up and out of the assembly.
7. Remove the four screws on the underside of the disc assembly to enable the first of the
PCB covers to be removed.
CAUTION:
The spring that is connected to the ejector fingers may recoil.
8. Remove the screw on the ejector spring cover and remove the cover carefully. Use long
nose pliers to lift the open end of the ejector spring off the ejector fingers control.
9. Replace the ejector fingers with a new part.
10. Replace the PCB cover and secure it with one screw.
11. Using long nose pliers, place the open end of the spring onto the ejector fingers control.
12. Replace the ejector fingers cover and reattach the screw. Replace the two remaining
screws to secure the PCB cover.
13. Replace the disc assembly into the hopper base.
14. Replace the hopper bowl, bowl extension and the hopper cover.
15. Replace the coins into the bowl.
16. Test the hopper using the Hopper Test option under the Test/Diagnostic Menu (refer to the
Machine Modes chapter).
7-8
7.3.2 Cleaning
To clean the hopper:
1. Remove the hopper.

2. Remove any dust that may have accumulated in and around the unit.
3. Clean the unit with a mild detergent and a damp cloth, making sure the liquid does not seep
into the electrical components.
4. Remove any dust from the photo-optic detector by using a soft long-bristled paintbrush, by
blowing through a drinking straw or by using canned air. Dust on the detector can result in
faulty coin counting.
5. Wipe the light guide in the optic area with a damp cloth, if required, making sure the liquid
does not seep into the electrical components.
6. Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure. Ensure that the unit is
functioning as expected.
WARNING:
Coin dust may accumulate in the hopper during use. Avoid inhaling the dust during
maintenance.
CAUTION:
Use only a mild detergent to clean the hopper components. Do not use sprays or
solvents.
7-9
Notes
7-10
Service Manual Bank Note Acceptor
Chapter 8
Bank Note Acceptor

8.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 JCM UBA Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Physical Description ............................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3 MEI Cashflow Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ....................................... 8-11
8.3.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4 CashCode Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ............................................. 8-14

8.4.2 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 8-18
8.5 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 8-19

8.5.2 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 8-19
8-1
Bank Note Acceptor Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 8-1 JCM UBA BNA ................................................................................................................... 8-4

Figure 8-2 JCM BNA Input/Output Connector ..................................................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-3 MEI Cashflow BNA........................................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-4 MEI Cashflow BNA 12 Pin Chassis Docking Station Connector ...................................... 8-13
Figure 8-5 CashCode BNA ................................................................................................................ 8-15
Figure 8-6 CashCode 24 pin Connector ............................................................................................ 8-17
List of Tables
Table 8-1 LED Error Codes ............................................................................................................... 8-10
Table 8-2 MEI Cashflow BNA Operating Conditions ......................................................................... 8-12
Table 8-3 CashCode BNA Operating Conditions .............................................................................. 8-16
8-2
8.1 Overview
The bank note acceptor (BNA) and ancillary items allow for the entry, security, analysis and
accounting of bank notes and tickets. The BNA communicates with the carrier board via the
backplane board.
The full system provides:
 A BNA for entering, sensing and accepting bank notes and tickets. The unit is equipped
with a microcontroller, an operating system, RAM and ROM.
 Optical scanning. The bank note or ticket is optically scanned for both transmissive and
reflective properties at each of four different wavelengths. There is also a magnetic sensor.
 A stacker unit that holds accepted bank notes and tickets in a secure environment. The
stacker is linked to the BNA.
 The BNA cage assembly that houses the BNA and stacker.
 The bank note entry area is highlighted by the animated display of LEDs and a
denomination decal that shows the acceptable bank note denomination(s).
 Ticket in, ticket out (TITO), which is a secure EGM payout solution.
8.2 JCM UBA Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted)

The bank note acceptor accepts a high percentage of valid currency. It has anti-pullback
security features and can be fitted with further security measures.
8.2.1 Physical Description

The JCM UBA BNA measures 29.8cm (11.73") by 22.5cm (8.86") by 10.44cm (4.11"). It weighs
approximately 4kg (8.81lbs).
8-3
Figure 8-1 JCM UBA BNA
0
01
A_
BN
Legend
1 Transport Assembly 2 Frame 3 Stacker
NOTE:
The bezel may vary in different venues, markets and jurisdictions.
8-4
Figure 8-2 JCM UBA Bill Acceptor with Lid Open and with Bill Drop Box Withdrawn
4
00
A_
BN
Figure 8-3 JCM UBA Bill Acceptor Assembly Components
1
3
5
00
BN
A_ 4
Legend
1 Acceptor 3 Frame
2 Transport 4 Bill Drop Box
8-5
Security
For security reasons, both the stacker access door and the stacker itself can be equipped with
high-security locks.
The status of the EGM belly door is monitored by the machine firmware. If this link is broken,
the EGM locks up and display the error message Door Open – Bank Note Acceptor on
the screen.
If the stacker is removed, the error message Stacker Removed is also displayed and the
alarm sounds through the speakers.
Both of these errors are reported to the online system (if fitted).
Mechanics and Transport

The transport assembly consists of the acceptor and transport. It slides into the BNA frame,
where it is securely latched in place. The stacker slides into position and latches into the frame
just below the transport.
The transport assembly houses the main logic assembly, two drive motors and associated
gears, belts and optointerrupters.
The main logic assembly provides all of the control functions for the acceptor. It may be
configured with either Flash (UBA-12) or EPROM (UBA-13) program memory.
One drive motor powers the drive belts, which transport the bank notes or tickets through the
acceptor and into the stacker. The other drive motor links via a gear train to the stacker
mechanism.
The two upper timing belts are individually tensioned to assure a reliable and straight feed. The
lower timing belt transports bank notes and tickets to the entrance of the stacker. Several levers
and optic sensors monitor the bank note or ticket progress into the stacker.
A connector and fixing are provided for the acceptor, which mounts into the transport assembly.
Two optointerrupters mounted at the rear of the transport monitor the presence of the stacker
and the activity of the bank note pusher.
Acceptor
Interchangeable guide rails in the acceptor allow the BNA to accept currency from a variety of
countries. Acceptable bank note widths are 66mm, 70mm, 75mm and 80mm (2.60", 2.76", 2.95"
and 3.15"). Acceptable lengths are determined in the software.
Two drive rollers in the front and two timing belts in the rear of the lower sensor unit of the
acceptor assure transport of the inserted bank note while several red, infrared and magnetic
sensors scan both faces.
Bank Note and Ticket Entry

When a bank note or ticket is inserted into the BNA, the unit grips it and moves it over the
magnetic head and through the optical system. A bank note can be inserted face up or face
down, either end first. Barcoded tickets must be inserted face up, either end first.
Analogue readings are taken every sixteenth of an inch, converted to their digital equivalents
and stored in RAM as a profile. The readings are matched to the profiles stored in program
8-6
memory. Three read attempts are performed before a bank note or ticket is classified as
unreadable.
If the bank note or ticket is rejected, it is returned to the player immediately. If it is accepted, the
EGM is notified of the value. If the value is acceptable, the bank note or ticket is sent to the
stacker and the credits are registered. If the value is not acceptable, the bank note or ticket is
rejected and returned to the player.
Stacker
The stacker includes drive belts and rollers to transport the bank note or ticket into the stacking
position. The second motor in the transport assembly drives them through a gear train.
When the bank note or ticket has moved into position, the pusher is activated via another gear
train and the bank note or ticket is stacked. The stacker has a capacity of approximately 500
bank notes and tickets.
Two plastic levers mounted to the frame connect the stacker and the pusher plate. These levers
mesh with two optointerrupters at the rear of the transport, allowing the microprocessor to detect
the stacker's presence and monitor the pusher's activity.
TITO (Ticket In, Ticket Out)

Ticket in, Ticket out (TITO) is a cost effective and secure EGM payout solution. TITO is the
cashless payout system that prints a player’s total winnings with a secure barcode on a voucher
(if a printer is fitted). The voucher can then be used for crediting an EGM. The JCM bill
acceptor is TITO capable. Barcode voucher functionality is controlled by DIP switch settings.
NOTE: DIP switch settings may vary depending on software changes related to
individual jurisdictions.
8-7
Interface Connector
The interface connector mounted at the back of the frame in the upper left corner provides
connections to the transport from the EGM backplane. Not all of the 20 available pins will be
used in any given installation. Actual pins connected will depend upon the protocol used.
Figure 8-4 JCM BNA Input/Output Connector
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BNA_006
8.2.2 Maintenance
The following procedures are used to maintain the BNA.

The transport assembly slides into the frame assembly and latches securely in place.
To remove the stacker:
1. Open the EGM door(s).

2. Unlock and open the stacker access door.
3. Grab the blue strap on the stacker and pull firmly to release it.
4. After the stacker is withdrawn, the currency access door in the bottom must be unlocked
before the bank notes can be withdrawn. This is normally done only in a secure soft count
facility. Each stacker may be numbered to assist accounting and control operations.
5. Replace the stacker box by pushing it into the frame until it locks into position.
6. Close and lock the drop box access door.
7. Close the EGM door(s).
To remove the bill acceptor transport:
1. Open the door(s) as required and switch the EGM off.

2. Press down on the release latch and slide the transport out of the frame.
8-8
Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams

If a jam occurs, the unit is usually able to clear itself within a short period as an automatic
process comes into effect. If the jam persists, a fault message is initiated and an EGM lockup
occurs.
CAUTION:
The bank acceptor is controlled by complex electronics. Unqualified personnel
must not interfere with the unit
Ensure the power is turned off before any maintenance procedures are carried out
on the bill acceptor or drop box.
The scanning and transport channel of the bill acceptor passes items directly to the stacker.
To clear an item lodged within the scanning channel:
1. Remove the transport as previously described.

2. Open the transport and inspect the bank note path.
3. Remove any obstructions found.
4. Reinstall the transport assembly as previously described.
To clear a JCM UBA BNA jam:
1. Open the door(s) as required and switch off the EGM.

2. Press down and hold the lower latch bar located at the front of the transport.
3. Slide the assembly towards you and out of the frame.
4. Open the acceptor and remove the jammed bank note from the unit.
5. Replace the acceptor. Ensure that all leads are correctly connected.
6. Switch on the EGM and close the door(s).
Calibration
Recalibrate the acceptor sensors annually and following any cleaning or repair operations,
unless operating conditions dictate increased frequency. Special JCM test paper is required.
Calibration may be done at the EGM if a JCM test harness is available. Remove the transport
assembly from the EGM, connect the harness to the plugs at the back of the frame and at the
back of the transport assembly and follow the procedure below. To calibrate the transport
assembly at the workbench, a JCM model PS15-006 is required to supply power to the BNA
transport.
To calibrate the BNA:
1. Remove the transport assembly (refer to the Maintenance section).

2. Set DIP switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 to the off (up) position and the other DIP switches to the on
(down) position.
3. Turn the power on.
4. Insert the test paper into the acceptor, black end first. The paper moves in and out several
times and is finally ejected. One of the following events occurs:
a. If the calibration is successful, the LED attached to the test harness blinks rapidly
(approximately ten flashes per second).
b. If the calibration is not successful, the LED flashes an error code as described in the
following table.
8-9
Table 8-1 LED Error Codes
Number of Blinks Error Detected
1 Entrance lever
2 Solenoid lever
3 Entrance sensor
4 Transport jam
5 Incorrect gain setting
6 Digital/analogue conversion
7 Bar code sensor
8 Acceptor head
9 Magnetic setting
10 Write-in
11 Black level
Refer to the JCM service manual for repair procedure information.
8-10
8.3 MEI Cashflow Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted)


The MEI Cashflow BNA is equipped with advanced digital processing technology and
algorithms.
Figure 8-5 MEI Cashflow BNA
011
BNA_
Legend
1 Acceptor Module 2 Chassis 3 Stacker
NOTE:
The bezel may vary in different venues, markets and jurisdictions.
8-11
The MEI Cashflow BNA consists of an optical scanning unit linked to a stacker that stores a
range of bank notes and tickets. The MEI BNA's acceptance rate is 98% or greater and it
attempts to read all bank notes. A USB port on the front of the unit provides an interface for
support tools. The BNA takes approximately three seconds to stack a bank note or ticket with a
maximum of one in transition at a time.
The following table details the operating conditions for the MEI Cashflow BNA.
Table 8-2 MEI Cashflow BNA Operating Conditions
Operating Conditions
Voltage Range 12V to 28V

Power Consumption Standby - 10W
During Acceptance - 30W
While stacking - 70W
Operating Environment 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F), 5 - 95% humidity
Storage Environment -30°C to 70°C (-22°F to 158°F), 5 - 95% humidity
Security
The stacker may be fitted with one or two security locks. Spacer washers may be required for
some lock types.

The BNA assembly consists of the acceptor module, interface card, chassis and bank note
stacker. The chassis provides mounting for the acceptor module, interface card, configuration-
specific cable and stacker. The acceptor module slides into the top of the chassis and securely
latches in place. The connectors at the back of the acceptor module establish electrical
connection to the corresponding contacts on the interface card. The stacker slides into position
and latches into the chassis beneath the acceptor module.
Acceptor
A combination of four standard wheels, four double-drive wheels and eight pressure rollers,
coupled with a continuous gear-drive system, provides automatic centring, alignment and
transport of the inserted item without the need for timing belts.
The two double-drive rollers near the front of the acceptor assure the inserted item is drawn in
and aligned correctly for identification and validation. Four gear-driven rollers assure a smooth
transition through the acceptor to the bank note stacker. Along the way, the item is illuminated
by a six-wavelength light bar and scanned by ten lensed receivers.
8-12

A bank note can be inserted face up or face down, either end first. Barcoded tickets must be
inserted face up, either end first. The unit grips the bank note or ticket, aligns it and moves it
through the optical system.
Analogue readings are taken along the entire length of the item, converted to their digital
equivalents and stored in random access memory (RAM) as a profile of the item. The stored
readings are matched against the profiles stored in program memory. If a bank note of a specific
denomination is identified, the digital signal processor attempts to validate the bank note as
genuine. Tickets are read only and are usually validated by the head system. If the bank note or
ticket is valid, the EGM is notified of the value of the bank note or ticket.
If a bank note or ticket is not recognised, it is returned to the player immediately. It is given three
read attempts before it is classified as unreadable. If the value of the bank note or ticket is
acceptable, it is sent to the stacker. If the value of the item is not acceptable, it is returned.
Credits are issued only after the bank note or ticket exits the bank note acceptor and reaches
the stacker.
Stacker
The stacker includes eight gear-driven rollers and eight pressure rollers to stack bank notes and
tickets. The motor in the acceptor module drives the rollers through a gear train. When a bank
note or ticket moves into position, the pusher activates via another gear train and the bank note
or ticket is stacked. The stacker can hold approximately 500 bank notes or tickets.
Interface Connector
MEI Cashflow BNAs have a cable that terminates with a 12-pin connector.
Figure 8-6 MEI Cashflow BNA 12 Pin Chassis Docking Station Connector
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
BNA_012
8-13
8.3.2 Maintenance
Clearing BNA Jams
NOTE:
Remove the bank note acceptor from the chassis to open the bank note path. If
the bank note acceptor is opened while in the chassis the connector board at the
rear of the acceptor will be damaged.
To clear a MEI BNA jam:
1. Open the door(s) as required.

2. Unlock the stacker lock(s).
3. Remove the acceptor by pulling upwards on the yellow bar at the front of the bank note
acceptor and pulling the assembly away from the chassis.
4. Open the acceptor by sliding the yellow cover forward and raise top of unit to expose the
bank note path.
5. Clear the bank note jam.
6. Close the acceptor and insert it back into the chassis and ensure the yellow bar locks into
place.
7. Close the door(s).
Calibration
The MEI Cashflow BNA does not require any calibration in the field. The unit has no switch
settings or calibration mode allowing user calibration. If the unit requires calibration then contact
the manufacturer.
8.4 CashCode Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted)


The CashCode BNA is equipped with advanced digital processing technology.
8-14
Figure 8-7 CashCode BNA
BN
A_
01
9
Legend
1 Chassis (Housing) 2 Acceptor 3 Stacker (Cassette)
(Validating Head)
NOTE:
The bezel may vary in different venues, markets, jurisdictions and models.
8-15
The CashCode BNA consists of an optical scanning unit linked to a stacker that stores a range
of bank notes and tickets. The CashCode BNA's acceptance rate is 98% or greater and it
attempts to read all bank notes. A USB port on the unit provides an interface for support tools.
The BNA takes approximately three seconds to stack a bank note or ticket with a maximum of
one in transition at a time.
The following table details the operating conditions for the CashCode BNA.
Table 8-3 CashCode BNA Operating Conditions
Operating Conditions
Voltage Range 12V to 24V

Power Consumption Standby - 0.6A
During Operating mode (max) - 3A
Operating Environment 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F), 30-90% non-condensing humidity

Storage Environment -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F), 30-90% non-condensing humidity
Security
The stacker may be fitted with one or two security locks. Spacer washers may be required for
some lock types.

The BNA assembly consists of the acceptor, chassis and bank note stacker. The chassis
provides mounting for the acceptor, configuration-specific cable and stacker. The acceptor
slides into the top of the chassis and securely latches in place. The connectors at the back of
the acceptor establish electrical connection to the corresponding contacts on the interface card.
The stacker slides into position and latches into the chassis beneath the acceptor.
Acceptor
A combination of wheels and pressure rollers provide automatic centring, alignment and
transport of the inserted item.
The inserted item is drawn in and aligned correctly for identification and validation. Rollers
assure a smooth transition through the acceptor to the bank note stacker.
8-16

A bank note or ticket can be inserted face up or face down, either end first. The unit grips the
bank note or ticket, aligns it and moves it through the optical system.
Tickets are read only and are usually validated by the head system. If the bank note or ticket is
valid, it is sent to the stacker. If a bank note or ticket is not recognised, it is returned to the
player immediately. It is given three read attempts before it is classified as unreadable. Credits
are issued only after the bank note or ticket exits the bank note acceptor and reaches the
stacker.
Stacker
The stacker includes rollers to stack bank notes and tickets. The motor in the acceptor drives
the rollers. When a bank note or ticket moves into position, the pusher activates and the bank
note or ticket is stacked. The stacker can hold 600 bank notes or tickets.
Interface Connector
CashCode BNAs use a 24-pin connector to connect to the EGM electronics.
Figure 8-8 CashCode 24 pin Connector
8-17
8.4.2 Maintenance
Clearing BNA Jams
NOTE:
Remove the bank note acceptor from the chassis before opening the bank note
path.
To clear a CashCode BNA jam:

2. Unlock the stacker lock(s).
3. Remove the acceptor by pulling upwards on the latch at the front bottom of the unit and
pulling the assembly forward.
4. Open the acceptor by pushing on the latch at the front top of the unit and raise to expose
the bank note path.
5. Clear the bank note jam.
6. Close the acceptor, insert it back into the chassis and ensure it locks into place.
Calibration
The CashCode BNA does not require any calibration in the field. The unit has no switch settings
or calibration mode allowing user calibration.
Refer to the CashCode service manual for repair procedure information.
8-18
8.5 Maintenance
Perform bank note acceptor maintenance as required.

The following procedures are used to remove and replace BNA components.
Stacker
To remove the stacker:

2. Unlock and open the stacker access door.
3. Grab the strap on the stacker and pull firmly to release it.
4. Unlock and open the currency access door to remove bank notes and tickets. This is
normally done only in a secure facility. Each bank note stacker may be numbered to assist
accounting and control operations.
5. Replace the bank note stacker by pushing it into the frame until it locks into position.
6. Close and lock the stacker access door.
Transport Assembly/Acceptor Module

To remove the transport assembly acceptor module:

2. Lift the acceptor release latch and slide the assembly toward you and out of the frame.
8.5.2 Cleaning
To remove surface deposits and smudges, wipe the bezel with a soft, dry lint-free cloth.
With prolonged use, a build-up of dirt from the surface of the bank notes will accumulate on the
pressure rollers, drive belt surfaces and BNA optics. Clean these areas to ensure reliable
operation.
CAUTION:
Caution must be exercised not to flood the bezel area. Liquids must not be allowed
to seep down into the BNA. Do not use any solvents as permanent damage to the
validator optics and other internal items may result.
8-19
To clean rollers, belt surfaces and validation optics:
1. Remove the BNA.

2. Open the BNA to gain access to the bank note path.
3. Using a soft lint-free cloth, wipe the surfaces of both the upper and lower guides to remove
any surface dirt. Pay particular attention to the optics area and the magnetic head when
removing deposits from the surfaces.
4. On the upper guide assembly, clean the surface of the pressure rollers.
5. On the lower guide assembly, clean timing belt surfaces by rotating one of the drive rollers
while holding the cleaning cloth against it.
CAUTION:
Do not clean the small round sensors unless a film or dirt is visible on the lens.
8-20
Service Manual Ticket Printer
Chapter 9
Ticket Printer
9.1 Overview ................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2 FutureLogic Printer (if fitted) .................................................................. 9-3

9.2.1 General Description ............................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Ticket Handling....................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Removal and Replacement Procedure .................................................................. 9-6
9.3 TransAct Epic 950 Printer (if fitted) ........................................................ 9-7

9.3.1 General Description ............................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.2 Ticket Handling....................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.3 Sensors ................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.3.4 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.6 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer (if fitted) .................................................... 9-14

9.4.2 Ticket Handling..................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.3 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 9-16
9.4.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 9-18
9.5 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 9-19

9.5.1 Checking the Printer Function .............................................................................. 9-19
9.5.2 Removing Excess Dust ........................................................................................ 9-19
9.5.3 Cleaning the Print Head ....................................................................................... 9-19
9-1
Ticket Printer Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 9-1 FutureLogic Printer.............................................................................................................. 9-3

Figure 9-2 FutureLogic Interface Cable Port Pin Locations .................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9-3 Loading Tickets into the FutureLogic Printer ....................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9-4 FutureLogic Printer Removal............................................................................................... 9-6
Figure 9-5 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer ......................................................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-6 Loading Tickets into the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer .................................................. 9-9
Figure 9-7 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Sensor Locations .......................................................... 9-10
Figure 9-8 Sample Test Ticket ........................................................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9-9 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer ..................................................................................... 9-14
Figure 9-10 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Drawer Fully Open ..................................................... 9-15
Figure 9-11 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Ticket Stack ............................................................... 9-15
Figure 9-12 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Feeding the Ticket ..................................................... 9-16
Figure 9-13 Removing the Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer ............................................................ 9-17
Figure 9-14 Self-Test Ticket ............................................................................................................... 9-18
List of Tables
Table 9-1 FutureLogic Printer Specifications ........................................................................................ 9-4
Table 9-2 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Specifications ................................................................... 9-8
Table 9-3 Sensor Functions of the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer ................................................. 9-11
Table 9-4 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Status LEDs ................................................................... 9-13
9-2
9.1 Overview
The ticket printer prints tickets that where jurisdictional constraints permit allows venues to use
custom designed layouts. The ticket printer can produce barcoded tickets that can be
recognised by the bank note acceptor if it is ticket in, ticket out (TITO) capable.
9.2 FutureLogic Printer (if fitted)

The following section describes the FutureLogic printer.

The FutureLogic is a thermal printer that makes the cashout ticket available only after the ticket
is fully printed internally and automatically separated from the unprinted tickets in the ticket tray.
Figure 9-1 FutureLogic Printer
5
00
N_
PR
The FutureLogic also offers:

 The Promotional Matrix Couponing System.
 Colour printing capability.
 A USB communication port.
 A dedicated promotional printing port.
 A separate port for firmware upgrades.
9-3
Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of the FutureLogic printer.
Table 9-1 FutureLogic Printer Specifications
Parameter Value
Dimensions (WxDxH) 110mm (4.33") x 304.8mm (12.00") x 64.3mm (2.53")
Weight 1.23kg (2.7lbs)
Power 24V DC @ 2.7A
Interface Bi-directional RS232C, 9600Bd
Operating Temperature 0°C (32°F) to 70°C (158°F)
Storage Temperature -20°C (-4°C) to 85°C (185°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Sensors Paper low, paper out, printer drawer open, ticket taken, ticket jam,
ticket in chute, black mark (includes a host controllable buzzer)
Ticket Storage 300 tickets (with standard tray)
Memory 1MB Flash and 128K RAM
Resolution Resolution 8 dots/mm (203dpi)
Figure 9-2 FutureLogic Interface Cable Port Pin Locations
2
PRN_006
4 3
Legend
1 18-pin Base Port 3 3-pin Bezel LED Control
Port
2 4-pin Auxiliary Port 4 14-pin RS232 Port
9-4
9.2.2 Ticket Handling

The automatic ticket-loading feature simplifies the ticket loading process.
Figure 9-3 Loading Tickets into the FutureLogic Printer
1
2
PRN_0
01
Legend
1 Paper Stack 2 Paper Tray
To load tickets:

2. Pull open the printer drawer until the ticket tray is completely accessible.
3. Load the ticket stack in the printer as indicated by the band around the stack and the label
on the bottom of the ticket tray.
4. Feed the ticket into the ticket-loading slot and release it once the motor engages and the
printer grasps the paper. The printer automatically pulls through a ticket or two, leaving it
set at the top of the next ticket.
5. Remove the excess tickets from the printer.
9-5

To remove the FutureLogic printer assembly:

2. Slide the printer out until it catches.
3. Disconnect the loom which is at the side of the printer.
4. Push back the release catch underneath printer.
5. Slide the printer out.
Figure 9-4 FutureLogic Printer Removal
PRN_007
Legend
1 Loom 2 Release Catch
NOTE:
Run a printer test or a complete EGM test after replacing the printer.
9-6
9.3 TransAct Epic 950 Printer (if fitted)

The following section describes the TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer.

The TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer supports macro features and a high-level command
interface that enables quicker and easier integration of more layout and printing options.
Figure 9-5 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer
5
4
3
1 00
2 2
N_
PR
Legend
1 Ticket Bezel 3 Printer LEDs 5 Ticket
2 Inner Chassis Assembly 4 Ticket Bucket Assembly
9-7
Features
The TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer’s features include:
 Perforated fan folded tickets in a stack of 200, 300 or 400 tickets.

 Barcode and total ticket cashout capabilities.
 Ticketburst, which incorporates print, burst and transport zones when the ticket is
completely printed.
 A hot swappable printer mechanism design for easy service.
 A modular interface printed circuit board (PCB).
 Printing selections of 7.5, 10, 12, 16.5 and 20 characters per inch.
 Printing selections of normal, double-high, double-wide and double-high/double-wide.
 Sensors for burst ticket, ticket low, top-of-form/ticket out, chassis open and ticket taken.
 A cover open switch.
 A modular printer mechanism, ticket tray and sliding unit for easy maintenance.
 An open ticket path for ticket jam clearing.
 A [Feed] button and status LEDs (ready/paper/open/fault).
 Bezel lamp connection import firmware and graphics download port.
 Page mode printing.
 An audible buzzer.
Specifications
The following table details the functional specifications of the TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer.
Table 9-2 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Specifications
Feature Specification
Print Speed 125mm (4.92")/sec max. monochrome (in text mode)
Print Resolution 203dpi x 203dpi
Printing Method Fixed linear head
Power Requirement 24V DC ± 10% 2.2A max.
Ticket Dimensions 65mm (2.56in) x 156mm (6.14in)
Interface RS232 bi-directional XON/XOFF
Communications Protocol 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit
Bezel Dimensions 139mm (5.47") x 85mm (3.35")
Printer Depth 284mm (11.18")
Weight 1.73kg (3.80lb)
9-8

The TransAct Epic 950’s ticket tray is integrated with a guide to direct the ticket into the printer
mechanism. Once the leading ticket enters the top of the form sensor, the ticket automatically
feeds into the printer mechanism.
Figure 9-6 Loading Tickets into the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer
1 2 3
PRN_014
Legend
1 Printer Ticket 2 Ticket Stack 3 Ticket Tray
To load tickets:

2. Ensure there is power to the printer.
3. Slide the printer forward until the ticket tray is clear.
4. Ensure the black bar is at the top front of the ticket.
5. Insert the first ticket of the stack into the printer by hand. After it has been inserted about
13mm (0.51"), the printer automatically completes the loading.
6. Slide the printer back into its working position.
There are two ways to remove unused tickets from the printer mechanism assembly.
To remove tickets using the ticket cover:

2. Slide the printer forward until the ticket tray is free.
3. Lift and rotate the ticket cover towards the rear of the printer.
4. Remove all tickets from the ticket path and check for any debris.
5. Remove any remaining tickets from the tray.
6. Rotate the ticket cover into its original closed and magnetically latched position.
7. Load the tickets into the printer.
8. Slide the printer back to its working position.
9-9
To remove tickets using the [Feed] button:

2. Slide the printer forward until the ticket tray is free.
3. Separate the ticket currently loaded from the ticket bundle.
4. Press the [Feed] button to eject the loaded ticket.
5. Remove any remaining tickets from the tray.
6. Load the tickets into the printer.
7. Slide the printer back to its working position.
9.3.3 Sensors
The TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer uses several sensors to provide feedback to the host
system. All power and interface communications are handled by the communications printed
circuit board (PCB).
Figure 9-7 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Sensor Locations
2
3
4
PRN
_015
Legend
1 Ticket Low Sensor 3 Cover Open Switch
2 Top of Form/Ticket Out 4 Ticket Taken Sensor
Sensor (inside mechanism)
9-10
The following table describes the functions of the sensors.
Table 9-3 Sensor Functions of the TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer
Sensor Function
Cover Open Switch Detects when the ticket cover is open. Printing and ticket feeding
processes are stopped until the cover is closed.
Ticket Low Sensor Senses the number of tickets remaining in ticket bucket (i.e.
below five to ten tickets). Ticket low status is reported on the
status byte when the host issues a status request.
Top-of-Form/Ticket Out Controls ticket loading and printing.
Sensor
Ticket Taken Sensor Determines when a customer takes a printed ticket.
Chassis Open Determines if the inner chassis is fully racked. If not, the status
Sensor/Audible Alarm LED blinks.
9.3.4 Cleaning
Use a soft long-bristled paintbrush or canned air to clean the paper dust from inside the printer
and chassis area. Remove paper dust from the sensor optics.
If there is streaking on the printed ticket, the print head requires cleaning. Cleaning cards are
available through Transact or can be purchased direct from Enefco International Ltd.
To clean the print head:
1. Open the cover and remove all tickets from the ticket feed path. Close the cover.
2. Open the printer cleaning card pouch and remove the printer cleaning card. Insert the
printer cleaning card into the feed path. The printer cleaning card is automatically drawn
into the feed path.
3. Open the cover and remove the printer cleaning card by gently pulling it back. Repeat if
necessary.
4. Properly dispose of the used printer cleaning card.

Use the following procedure to remove the printer for servicing or replacement.
To remove the TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer:
1. Open the door(s) and switch off the EGM.

2. Pull the release tab at bottom centre of the printer and pull the printer out until it catches.
3. Slide the printer out.
NOTE:
9-11
9.3.6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting incorporates a self-test, printer status LEDs and printer error descriptions and
their remedies.
The TransAct Epic 950 ticket printer has the ability to print a pre-defined self-test ticket, to test
the normal printing functionality of the unit and create a printout of the current printer
configuration.
NOTE:
The information printed depends on the printer version.
If the printer is not performing correctly, check to see that the unit is receiving power. The green
Ready LED should be on when the printer is correctly receiving power. After confirming that the
printer is receiving power, check to see that the ticket was loaded correctly and is not jammed in
the ticket path.
To print a self-test ticket:
1. Remove the inner chassis as described in the TransAct Epic 950 OEM integration manual.
2. Open the ticket cover. Do not remove the currently loaded ticket.
3. Press and hold the [Feed] button until the Open LED turns off and release the button.
4. Close the ticket cover. The self-test ticket automatically prints.
5. Replace the inner chassis to resume normal operation.
Figure 9-8 Sample Test Ticket
9-12
Press the [Feed] button to advance a single ticket through the print mechanism and
automatically position it correctly. Ensure all connectors are firmly in place to ensure a proper
signal.
If the printer continues to feed tickets without stopping, check that the tickets are facing in the
right direction to allow the ticket present sensor to detect the alignment marks at the top of the
ticket.
The printer is fitted with a light emitting diode (LED) indicator system that communicates the
condition of the printer. The following table lists the different LED indications and provides a
brief description.
Table 9-4 TransAct Epic 950 Ticket Printer Status LEDs
Condition Ready LED Paper LED Open LED Fault LED

Unit Ready On Off Off Off
Cover Open On Off On Off
Chassis Open On Off Blink Off
Ticket Out On On Off Off
Ticket Low On Blink Off Off
Temperature Error Blink Off Off Blink
Paper Jam On Off Off Blink
RAM Error 2 Blinks Off Off On
Checksum Error 4 Blinks Off Off On
9-13
9.4 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer (if fitted)

The following section describes the Nanoptix Paycheck printer.

The Nanoptix Paycheck ticket printer requires no cartridges. It prints at an 8 dot/mm (203dpi)
resolution. It has a simple drop-in ticket loading procedure.
Figure 9-9 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer
2
1
PR
N_
0 08
Legend
1 LED 2 Paper Feed button
9-14

To load tickets:

2. Pull open the drawer to the fully open position.
Figure 9-10 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Drawer Fully Open
9
00
N_
PR
3. Load a ticket stack into the ticket cartridge in the orientation indicated on the label in the
bottom of the cartridge.
Figure 9-11 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Ticket Stack
4. Feed the first ticket into printer mechanism until resistance is met. The printer automatically
feeds the ticket and is ready to print.
9-15
Figure 9-12 Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer Feeding the Ticket
PR
N_
01
0
5. Slide the printer back into its working position.

9.4.3 Cleaning
NOTE:
Under normal operating conditions, the Nanoptix Paycheck print head should be
cleaned at least once every three months or 5km of paper printed, whichever
comes first.
To remove excess dust:

2. Slide the printer drawer open and remove the ticket tray.
3. Remove excess dust using canned air.
To clean the print head:
1. Remove the printer.

2. Press down on the paper guide assembly and pull one side of the roller towards the front
and remove the roller.
3. Clean the roller with a cotton swab dipped in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Clean the print line (black line on the print head) with a cotton swab dipped in isopropyl
alcohol. Take care not to wet other parts of the printer.
9-16

To remove the Nanoptix Paycheck ticket printer:

2. Pull the printer out until it catches.
3. Press the button to release the loom and pull the loom out.
4. Release the lever on the right side of the printer and pull out the last section of the printer.
Figure 9-13 Removing the Nanoptix Paycheck Ticket Printer
1
1
01
N_
PR
Legend
1 Button to Release Loom 2 Release Lever
NOTE:
9-17
9.4.5 Troubleshooting
A test ticket can be used to judge the print quality.
To print a test ticket:
1. Power on the printer while pressing and holding the [Paper Feed] button for approximately
three seconds. A test ticket prints approximately five seconds after.
2. Press the [Paper Feed] button once more and the ticket feeds. Pressing the button again
causes the printer to feed blank tickets.
Figure 9-14 Self-Test Ticket
PRN_012
9-18
9.5 Maintenance
The following general maintenance is used to maintain the printer.
9.5.1 Checking the Printer Function

To check that the printer is performing correctly:
 Perform a printer self-test.

 Check that all connectors are secure.
 Ensure that receipts are exiting correctly.
9.5.2 Removing Excess Dust

Use a soft brush or canned air to clean the paper dust from inside the printer and chassis area.
Remove paper dust from the sensor optics.
9.5.3 Cleaning the Print Head

If there is streaking on the printed ticket, the print head requires cleaning. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions to perform this task. Refer to individual printer sections for further
information.
9-19
Notes
9-20
Service Manual LCD Screens
Chapter 10
LCD Screens
10.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2 LCD Screen............................................................................................. 10-3

10.3 Feature Topbox LCD Screen ................................................................. 10-6

10.3.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 On-Screen Display (OSD) ...................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Touch Screen ......................................................................................... 10-9

10.4.1 Specifications ....................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 10-10
10.4.3 Touch Screen Calibration................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.4 Handling the Touch Screen................................................................................ 10-11
10.5 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 10-11
10-1
LCD Screens Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 10-1 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor ......................................................................................... 10-10
List of Tables

Table 10-3 Picture Display Initiate Settings ....................................................................................... 10-5
Table 10-6 OSD Key Functions ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Table 10-7 Touch Screen Specifications ........................................................................................... 10-9
10-2
10.1 Overview
The electronic gaming machine (EGM) cabinet is fitted with one or two LCD screens. The main
screen is located above the mid trim in the cabinet and the topbox LCD screen is located in the
topbox.
The main screen is the primary interface for the player. It displays games, pay information, play
options, operator menus and messages from the head system. It has touch screen capability. It
also displays the audit mode screens (refer to Machine Modes chapter).
The topbox LCD screen is located in the topbox. It displays additional graphics and jackpot
information. It does not have touch screen capability.
The main screen and the topbox screen are not interchangeable.
10.2 LCD Screen

The liquid crystal display (LCD) panel is a 22.0" high-resolution screen. The main screen for the
EGM includes a video cable, support bracket, touch sensor and controller.

The LCD screen is a colour active matrix liquid crystal display with an integral backlight system.
The matrix employs thin film transistors (TFT) as the active element.
The LCD screen is a transmissive type display operating in the normally black mode. It has a
22.0" diagonal measured active display area with WSXGA+ resolution (1050 vertical by 1680
horizontal pixel array) capability.
Each pixel is divided into red, green, blue sub-pixels or dots. The brightness of the sub-pixel
colour is determined with an 8-bit grey scale signal for each dot, presenting a palette of more
than 16.7 million colours.
10-3

The LCD panel specifications are detailed in the following table.
Table 10-1 LCD Specifications (typical)
Item Specification
Active Screen Size 558.80mm (22.0") diagonal
Active Area 473.76mm (18.65") x 296.1mm (11.66")
Pixel Pitch 0.282mm (0.01") RGB H x 0.282mm V (0.01")
Pixel Format 1680 horizontal by 1050 vertical pixels
Display Colours 8bit (16+M colours)
Luminance, White 230cd/m²
Viewing Angle 89/89/89/89
Power Consumption 47W
Weight 6.2kg (without touch)
7.5kg (with touch)
Electrical Specifications
The LCD screen is supplied with a complete open frame product that consists of a 22.0" TFT
LCD panel, an interface board and a CCFL power converter. The DC power to the LCD screen
is provided by the EGM. The LCD screen is plug and play ready.
Sync Input Signal Characteristics

The LCD screen has the input characteristics described in the table below.
Table 10-2 Sync Input Signal Characteristics
Parameter Unit Data

Horizontal Frequency kHz 59.3-75
Vertical Frequency Hz 56-76
LCD Power Detection and Power Save

A signal is returned from the LCD screen and sensed by the EGM to confirm the positive
connection of the screen. Power save mode is initiated when necessary.
10-4
Power Requirements
Each LCD works with DC power supply from the EGM, requiring +24V ±2V at the power
identified previously in the specifications.
+24V Power Connection

A 4-pin Microfit jr connector is used to connect to the EGMs +24V power supply.
Image Specifications
The LCD screen meets the requirements of the image specifications after a ten minute warm up.
However, the picture quality is very close to the specifications after switching on the LCD for
less than one minute. Unless otherwise stated the specifications apply to the full range of
brightness and across the range of operating temperatures
Table 10-3 Picture Display Initiate Settings
Item Setting Requirements

Default Sync Mode WSXGA
White Colour Temperature (centre) D6500
CIE Coordinates:
x = 0.313 ± 0.015
y = 0.329 ± 0.015
Brightness Adjustment Range

The light output of a white pattern is increased by more than 60cd/m² when adjusting the
brightness level from minimum to maximum with contrast set at a maximum level.
User Adjustment
User adjustments are available as on-screen display (OSD) controls and are adjusted on a
remote control board. For more information, refer to the On-Screen Display (OSD) section.
10-5
10.3 Feature Topbox LCD Screen

The feature topbox LCD panel is a 31.5" high-resolution screen. It is used in the feature topbox
in a portrait mode, which means that the shorter side of the screen is horizontal.

The LCD is a colour active matrix liquid crystal display with an integral backlight system. The
matrix employs thin film transistors (TFT) as the active element.
It is a transmissive type display operating in the normally black mode. This TFT-LCD has a 31.5"
diagonal measured active display area with a resolution of 1080 x 1920 pixels.
Each pixel is divided into red, green, blue sub-pixels or dots. Grey scale or the brightness of the
sub-pixel colour is determined with an 8-bit grey scale signal for each dot, thus, presenting a
palette of more than 16.7M colours.
10.3.2 Specifications
The LCD panel specifications are detailed in the following table.
Table 10-4 LCD Specifications (typical)
Item Specification
Active Screen Size 800.10mm (31.5") diagonal
Active Area 698.40mm (27.50") x 392.85mm (15.47")
Pixel Pitch 0.36375mm (0.1")
Pixel Format 1080 horizontal by 1920 vertical pixels
Display Colors 8bit (16+M colors)
Luminance, White 360-450cd/m²
Viewing Angle 89/89/89/89
Weight 5.3kg (11.68lbs)
Electrical Specifications
The LCD screen is supplied with a complete open frame product that consists of a 31.5" TFT
LCD panel, an interface board and a CCFL power converter. The DC power to the LCD screen
is provided by the EGM. The LCD screen is plug and play ready.
10-6
Sync Input Signal Characteristics

The LCD screen has the input characteristics described in the table below.
Table 10-5 Sync Input Signal Characteristics
Parameter Unit Data

Horizontal Frequency kHz 60-73 (67.5 typical)
Vertical Frequency Hz 47-63 (60 typical)
User Adjustment
User adjustments are available as on-screen display (OSD) controls and are adjusted on a
remote control board. For more information, refer to the On-Screen Display (OSD) section.
10-7
10.4 On-Screen Display (OSD)

The on-screen display (OSD) controls are operated from the push-button control PCBA, which
has various buttons used to change the LCD screen settings as required.
The user presses [Mode] to enter the user mode procedures and when finished making
adjustments, presses [Mode] to exit and return to normal screen operations. A wide blue line at
the base of the screen indicates that user mode is active. The Recall function may be used in
this mode to return all settings to factory settings.
The options that can be configured include:
 Brightness.
 Contrast.
 Colour.
 Recall (Factory Reset).
 Language.
 Position.
 Time out interval.
Key functions are found in the table below.
Table 10-6 OSD Key Functions
Function
[Mode] or [Menu] Call the main menu OSD
[Sel] Call the sub menu OSD
[Down] and [Up] Moves the cursor within the main menu and sub
menus. Also makes adjustments within options.
[Auto] (if fitted) Not used.
NOTE:
Allow the LCD screen to warm up for a few minutes before attempting any
adjustments.
10-8
10.5 Touch Screen

The main LCD screen is fitted with a touch screen that enables games to be played by touching
designated areas of the screen. The controller has an RS232 interface and receives 12V DC
power from the screen.
NOTE:
The topbox LCD does not use a touch screen.
10.5.1 Specifications
The following table provides detailed specifications for the touch screen.
Table 10-7 Touch Screen Specifications
Item Specification
Power Requirement 5-12V DC (typical)
Operating Current USB: 75mA Serial: 85mA
Resolution 1024 x 1024 touch points (16k x 16k max)
Baud Rate 2400 baud between controller and game
Communications Parameters N81
Response Time Better than 15ms
Touch Contact Requirement 5.4ms (min 3ms)
Accuracy 1% error
Output Communications Bi-directional asynchronous RS-232C serial
communication
Operating Temperature Range -40C (-40F) - 70C (158F)
Operating Humidity Range 0-95% non-condensing
10-9
10.5.2 Operation
The touch screen uses analogue capacitive touch technology. At the core of this technology is
an all-glass sensor with a transparent, thin-film conductive coating fused to its surface. Glass
coating is applied over the conductive coating, completely protecting and sealing the entire
sensor. Along the edges is a narrow printed copper electrode pattern that uniformly distributes a
low voltage AC field over the conductive layer. The electrode is taped over on the completed
touch screen to protect it.
When a finger touches the screen surface, it draws a minute amount of current to the point of
contact. Voltage distortion at each corner is related to the distance to the finger and this
distortion is used to locate the touch point.
Figure 10-1 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor
LCD
_00
1
Legend
1 Anti-reflective Etched or Polished 3 Glass Coating
Surface
2 Conductive Coating
The touch sensor has a resolution of 1024 x 1024 touch points. The controller averages the
entire area of finger contact to a single point, giving users pixel-by-pixel control when touching
the screen. The touch screen records a touch within 15ms of finger contact. This performance
gives users virtually instant response.
The touch screen is robust, allowing it to perform in contaminated environments. Contaminants

such as grease, water and dirt do not interfere with the capacitive screen’s speed, accuracy or
resolution. In addition, the controller does not respond to stationary objects on the screen (e.g.
food particles).
The touch screen all-glass overcoat allows it to be resistant to scratches and not show wear
over time. The controller enables it to eliminate noise from EMI, drifting caused by temperature
shifts and humidity and damage from static discharges. However, if the protective overcoat is
damaged to such an extent that the underlying conductive coat is disturbed, severe inaccuracies
in determining finger position can occur.
10-10
10.5.3 Touch Screen Calibration

Refer to the Machine Modes chapter for touch screen calibration.
10.5.4 Handling the Touch Screen

The touch screen must be handled with care. The following precautions must be taken:
The touch screen must be handled with care. The following precautions must be taken:
1. The touch screen has black tape protecting the electrodes at the edge of the screen.
This tape must not be removed as it excludes light and dust.
2. When unpacking a screen, always lift directly out of the carton and place base-down on a
flat bench.
3. Check the EGM door(s) to ensure that it does not apply pressure to the taped area.
Excessive pressure on the taped area may result in edge breakages or vibration wear
damage to the electrode pattern.
4. Never remove the touch screen by gripping and pulling the flat cable. This may break
the cable.
5. Handle the screen with gloves to avoid leaving fingerprints or smudges. The
transparency of the touch screen is critical.
6. Once removed from the original package, do not stack screens or they may be
scratched.
7. Do not place heavy objects on the touch screen.
8. Prevent assembly tools from coming into contact with the touch screen. Whenever
possible, use plastic tools.
9. Blow any contaminants from the surface with a filtered de-ionized air source before
cleaning with a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Ensure that there
are no contaminants in the cloth.
10. Prevent liquids from contacting the edges of the touch screen.
CAUTION:
When removing the touch screen for servicing, do not pry the touch screen off the
LCD panel. Breakage may result in injury.
NOTE:
Re-calibrate the touch screen after exchanging it.
10.6 Maintenance
To maintain the screens:
1. Turn the EGM off.

2. Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces.
3. Clean the screen with a soft cloth and mild cleaning agent.
4. Ensure the screen fits correctly when the doors are closed.
10-11
Notes
10-12
Service Manual Main Logic Assembly
Chapter 11
Main Logic Assembly

11.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.2 Functional Description.......................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Carrier Board Assembly ........................................................................ 11-4

11.2.1 COM Express Module .......................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.2 Carrier Board ........................................................................................................ 11-6
11.2.3 Mass Storage Device ......................................................................................... 11-12
11.2.4 Smart Card ......................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.5 Video Graphics ................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.6 Connectors ......................................................................................................... 11-14
11.3 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 11-16
11-1
Main Logic Assembly Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 11-1 Logic Cage and Location of Carrier Board ..................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11-2 Carrier Board Layout - Issue B ........................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11-3 Carrier Board Block Diagram - Issue B ........................................................................... 11-7
List of Tables
Table 11-1 COM Express Module ..................................................................................................... 11-5
Table 11-2 Ethernet LED Functions .................................................................................................. 11-8
Table 11-3 UART Allocation .............................................................................................................. 11-8
Table 11-4 SPI Channel Allocation .................................................................................................. 11-10
Table 11-5 POST Code Display ...................................................................................................... 11-11
Table 11-6 Description of LEDs....................................................................................................... 11-11
Table 11-7 Description of Connectors ............................................................................................. 11-14
11-2
11.1 Overview
The main logic assembly provides central control of the electronic gaming machine (EGM). It
consists of a carrier board assembly mounted on a metal tray that plugs into the logic cage.

The main logic assembly is located within the logic cage. The logic cage is a lockable metal box
that provides security and protection for its contents.
Figure 11-1 Logic Cage and Location of Carrier Board
3
4
5
1
VILO
GIC_
0 02
8 7 6
Legend
1 Logic Cage 4 Cage for Jurisdiction- 7 COM Express
specific Communications (mounted on carrier
board)
2 Backplane Board 5 Hard Disk/Solid State 8 Video Board
Drive (mounted on carrier
board)
3 Logic Cage Door Hinge 6 Carrier Board at Base of
(Door not shown) Cage
(plugged into backplane
board)
11-3
11.1.2 Functional Description

The carrier board assembly interfaces with the following devices, depending on EGM features,
via the backplane board:
 Main LCD screen/touch screen (if fitted).

 Electromechanical meter board (if fitted).
 Power supply assembly.
 Buttons and button lamps.
 Network interface (if fitted).
 Link progressive system (if fitted).
 Player marketing module (if fitted).
 Security devices.
 Money management devices.
 Printer (if fitted).
 Mechanical security switches.
 Optical security switches.
 Key switches.
 Optional I/O connector.
Additional connectivity provided at the front of the assembly includes:
 Network interface.
 GAT port.
 Debug port.
11.2 Carrier Board Assembly
CAUTION:
Not all carrier board assemblies are approved in all jurisdictions. For more
information check with your authorised service organisation.
The major components of the assembly include:
 COM Express module.

 Carrier board.
 Logic cage tray.
 Mass storage device.
 Smart card content protection device.
 ADD2 video graphics interface card.
11-4
11.2.1 COM Express Module

The COM Express module provides essential computing functions and contains the core system
components of a modern PC.
COM Express is an open specification of the PICMG (PCI Industrial Computer Manufacturer
Group). It is an embedded computing module concept, specifying a computer on module
(COM).
The features of the COM Express module are listed on the following table.
Table 11-1 COM Express Module
Feature Description
Physical Basic COM Express module, Type 2
size 125mm (4.92") x 95mm (3.74") x 18mm (0.71")
Processor Intel® Celeron® Dual Core Processor 45nm T3100
(1M cache, 1.00 GHz, 800 MHz FSB)
Chipset Mobile Intel® GM45 Express chipset with 82801IEM I/O controller hub
(ICH9M-E)
Graphics Controller Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator 4500MDH (integrated in Intel®
GM45 chipset)
Memory Dual channel memory, 2GB (2 x 1GB DDR3 in 2 SO-DIMM sockets)
Audio Intel® High Definition Audio
Video Dual channel Intel® Serial Digital Video Out (SDVO) interface to the
ADD2 graphic card.
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000Base-TX
I/O 8 x USB 2.0 ports
2 SATA PORTS
1 STANDARD PARALLEL IDE INTERFACE
LPC Bus, I2C Bus
Security Trusted Platform Module Infineon TPM 1.2 SLB 9635
Expansion PCI-Express x 1; PCI-Express x 16
Connectors Two 220 pin COM Express standard connectors
Power Input Supply input: +12V +/-10%, +5V Standby optional
Consumption: 35W max. (T3100)
Environmental Temperature 0°C (32°F) - 50°C (122°F) [operating]
Temperature Humidity 85% [operating, non-condensing]
11-5
11.2.2 Carrier Board

The carrier board provides two distinctive groups of functions. Part of the design interfaces to
the COM Express module and adds connectivity based on PC technologies, including SATA,
PATA/CF, USB and PCI Express. The gaming specific circuitry integrates circuitry previously
used on the main board and a number of interface cards. Gaming specific functions are
controlled and monitored through the PCI bus, which is connected to the COM Express module.
Figure 11-2 Carrier Board Layout - Issue B
CARRIERBD_001
11-6
Figure 11-3 Carrier Board Block Diagram - Issue B
Graphic Card/ Intel

ADD2 Card CPU
Memory
PCIe x 16 slot
GMCH Module
HDD/SSD (1)
SATA HDD/SSD (2)

PCIe x 1 slot IDE
Audio Compact
ICH USB
Flash
Ethernet PCI
LPC HD Audio
COM-Express Module Codec
Backplane Connectivity
BIOS LPC UARTS
HW
SPI
Protection
FPGA
Smart Card Misc
SRAM
CARRIERBD_002
The carrier board provides mechanical support and connectivity for the COM Express module.
Audio
The COM Express module provides an Intel high definition audio interface. The carrier board
accommodates an audio codec device with multi-channel audio output.
BIOS
The carrier board boots from a single BIOS chip and loads further data from the mass storage
device.
The BIOS chip is connected directly to COM Express via LPC/FWH bus. The LPC bus is also
connected to the FPGA for security purposes. There is no BIOS chip on the COM Express.
BIOS set up parameters are defined by EEPROM connected via an I²C bus and driven from the
COM Express. If the EEPROM is not present, default parameters are used.
Ethernet
The carrier board implements a single gigabit Ethernet port directly supplied from the COM
Express.
The Ethernet connector is located on the front edge of the carrier board. Status LEDs are
provided on the connector where they are visible when the logic cage door is closed.
Standard LED Functions (depending on Ethernet driver functionality) can be found in the table
below.
11-7
Table 11-2 Ethernet LED Functions
LED Colour Activity

LINK (left) Orange 1000Base-T connection available.
Green 100Base-TX connection available.
Off 10Base-T connection available or no link.
ACTIVITY (right) Yellow Flashing light indicates activity (data packet transfers)
Evidence Tape
The BIOS chip, EEPROM and CompactFlash may be sealed to the carrier board with evidence
tape by regulators.
GAT Port
The carrier board implements a GAT3 serial port. The GAT port is positioned along the front
edge of the carrier board where it can be easily accessible when the logic cage door is open.
Identification
A silicon ID device is embedded on carrier board to uniquely identify the assembly.
Serial Ports
For markets with specific communications requirements a communications board can be
connected to the market dependent slot positioned inside the logic cage. Dedicated serial ports
are allocated for peripherals as indicated in UART allocation table below.
Table 11-3 UART Allocation
UART Function EGM Interface

0 Touch Screen Main Touch Screen RS232
1 BNA Bank Note Acceptor RS232
2 Systems Systems RS232
3 Printer Printer RS232
4 Com 4 Progressives RS232
5 Com 5 - RS232
6 GAT port GAT3 RS232
7 Com 7 - RS232
8 Com8/Topbox Second Touch Screen FTB
9 Com 9 LAB1 RS232
10 Com 10 LAB2 RS232
11 ccTalk
12 Doesn't exist
13 Doesn't exist
14 Com 11 IrDA TTL
11-8
ccTalk Interface
The ccTalk protocol is used for cash handling and coin validation equipment. One ccTalk
interface is provided with the host controller on the carrier board. The ccTalk bus can be
operated in point-to-point or multi-drop mode, allowing the connection of several slave devices.
Meter RAM
The board has three 512 Kb × 16 static RAM chips with power backed up by two batteries.
Battery Backup
Two long life BR-2/3A size lithium batteries provide back-up power for the SRAM and also
supply power for the real time clock (RTC) located on the COM Express module. The batteries
are designated BT1 and BT2 on the carrier board and are secured by cable ties to their holders.
PCI Express
A PCI Express x 16 connector is provided on the carrier board and a PCI Express x 1 expansion
connector is provided for future use.
USB
Eight USB 2.0/1.1 ports are supported by the carrier board. USB ch.0 for is dedicated for
software development. The connector is located on the front edge of the carrier board and is
only accessible when the logic cage door is open. USB ch. 1-5 are located on the backplane
and use connector types are based on the GDS standard. USB ch. 6 is directly linked to a
connector board connector. USB ch. 7 is directly linked to a market dependent connector.
11-9
Serial Peripheral Interface

Eight serial peripheral interface (SPI) channels are provided on the carrier board. Five are SPI
channels for legacy interfaces and three are new fast SPI channels provided for new
functionality.
Table 11-4 SPI Channel Allocation
SPI Channel Function

1 Topbox Animation
2 Electromechanical Meters Board
3 Player Button Lamps/LED
4 Player Button
5 Mechanical Security
6 LCD Edge Lighting
7 Light Tower
8 Topbox Lighting
FPGA
The carrier board accommodates the Altera Cyclone II FPGA. A 32bit/ 33MHz PCI bus is
connected to FPGA. All legacy interfaces are supported in the FPGA.
Playbuttons and Playbutton Illumination

The carrier board accommodates circuitry for driving playbutton illumination and switches. The
design supports 24V incandescent lamps, 24V LED and 12V LED illumination.
11-10
POST Code Display

A pair of 7-segment displays (located at the front right corner of the carrier board when in the
logic cage) is used to provide feedback about the operational status of the carrier board
assembly.
When the system is not in reset, BIOS power-on self test (POST) codes or other operational
codes are displayed. These codes are two digit hexadecimal numbers.
The table below shows the meanings of some common sequences and codes that display on
the POST code display.
Table 11-5 POST Code Display
Sequence or Code Meaning

(All segments off) No power
(All segments on) Reset
(Left decimal point on) 24V and 12V supply rails are within tolerance
(Right decimal point on) 5V, 3.3V and 1.2V supply rails are within tolerance
F8 BIOS security check failed
eo Overbuild protection check failed
eb BIOS verification failed
Status Indicator Lights

The following LED indicators are present on the board and provide feedback about the
operational status of the carrier board assembly.
Table 11-6 Description of LEDs
LED Colour Activity

D39 Red SATA activity.
D45 SCPWR Red Smart card activity. Do not replace the smart card while this
indicator is lit.
D47 CFACT Red CompactFlash activity.
D50 VSB Green 3.3V standby voltage is present. No accurate supply tolerance
measurement is provided.
Power
The carrier board is supplied from the 24V DC supply rail. All internal voltage rails are derived
from this source. A 12V supply rail is used only for the COM Express module and graphics card.
Mains voltage is detected by a hardware power fail signal generated by the mains power supply.
This signal provides an early warning when the EGM power is down. A 5V stand-by rail supplies
power to the COM Express circuitry when in wake on LAN (WOL) mode. The 24V and 12V rails
are without supply in this mode. Two independent batteries provide a power source for volatile
data backup and for security monitoring.
11-11
Mechanical Support
The carrier board assembly is mechanically mounted and supported by a metal bracket. The
bracket provides mechanical protection for electronic assemblies and facilitates modularity
design aspects. Ejector levers are located on the metal bracket. The bracket provides a good
quality high frequency ground point.
11.2.3 Mass Storage Device

The carrier board supports CompactFlash and hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (SSD)
interfaces. The BIOS default boot device is the CompactFlash. The HDD/SSD and any other
through-USB port attached device can only be used as a storage device.
CompactFlash (CF)
The carrier board supports one CompactFlash card interface.
The interface supports the maximum possible interface speed supported by the COM Express
module and reads high speed cards with a sustained read performance of at least 10 Mbytes/s.
The CompactFlash connector is positioned along the front edge of the carrier board and is
easily accessible with the logic cage door open.
NOTE:
The CompactFlash card may only be installed or replaced while the EGM is
powered down or in standby mode.
11-12
Hard Disk Drive/Solid State Drive (HDD/SSD)

A standard SATA connector and proprietary power connectors with 3.3V power are provided on
the carrier board. Only mobile hard disk drives or solid state drives that do not require additional
supply voltages are supported.
A mechanical space provision for 2.5" HDD/SSD is allocated inside the logic cage. The
HDD/SSD is not installed.
NOTE:
The HDD/SSD may only be installed or replaced while the EGM is powered down
or in standby mode.
USB Stick Storage Device

A USB stick may be installed in the designated port located at the front of the logic cage beside
the door security switch, providing a separate physical storage device for jurisdictions requiring
this function.
11.2.4 Smart Card

The carrier board uses an ID-000 25mm (0.98") × 15mm (0.59") ISO 7816 smart card. The
smart card socket is mounted on the front edge of the carrier board so the smart card can be
replaced without removing the carrier board from the logic cage.
NOTE:
The smart card may only be installed or replaced while the EGM is powered down
or in standby mode.
11.2.5 Video Graphics

The graphics and memory controller hub (GMCH) chip in the COM Express module is an
internal graphic core that has the capability to support external graphic accelerators. The chip
provides one dedicated analogue output and two digital display ports. Serial digital video out
(SDVO) ports are multiplexed with the PCI Express graphics interface. The SDVO ports are not
available if an external graphic device/card is in use.
The carrier board implements PCI Express x 16. It provides an extension for an ADD2 card or
an external graphics card. A PCIe x 16 connector with retention clip is required on the carrier
board for securing a graphic card.
LCD screens support a standard resolution for a 22" screen of 1680 x 1050. Higher resolution,
such as 1920 x 1080 full HD) is supported with "reduced blanking". Display devices may not
support all resolutions available from the graphics card.
11-13
11.2.6 Connectors
The following table shows the details of the principal external connectors on the carrier board.
Table 11-7 Description of Connectors
No. Name Type Function Comments

J1 CON 110W F RA HM Backplane interface
2mm (0.07") Au_30u"
PF U
2mm (0.07") Au_30u"
PF U
2mm (0.07") Au_30u"
PF U
J4 CON 2x220W M FH COM Express Additional mounting
0_5BTB 8H SM UL94 connectors posts are available to
secure the COM
Express module in
correct position.
J5 CON 164W F ST PCI Express or A PCI Express
PCIeX16 Au_FL TH SDVO Graphics graphics or ADD2
UL Card video interface card
may be plugged in.
The ADD2 card is the
standard video
configuration. This
socket is also
compatible with non-
specified, optional
PCI Express
expansion cards.
J6 CON 36W F ST PCI Express x1 An optional PCI
PCIeX1 Au_FL TH Express x1 expansion
UL94 card may be plugged
into this socket.
J7 GBE CON 8W F ST Gigabit Ethernet This connector
MOD_RJ45 RA LAN Port remains accessible
SHL_GND M when the logic cage
door is closed.
J8 SATA CON 7W M ST SATA SATA data
Au_15u" TH UL94V
J9 SATAPWR CON 4W M ST HDR SATA power Only 5V is supplied
uCLASP 2mm (0.07") for compatibility with 2
TH UL9 1/2" mobile hard
drives.
J10 Not Fitted.
J11 SC CON 4W F ST Smart card holder This SIM-type smart
USB_A RA SHLD card holder can
UL94V0 accommodate ID-000
sized cards.
11-14
No. Name Type Function Comments

J12 CF CON 25Wx2 M ST CompactFlash card The interface is
CF2 RA PEG Au SM (can read both Type directly connected to
U I and Type II cards) the IDE bus of the
Intel chipset, so the
carrier board must be
off when replacing
CompactFlash cards.
J13 CON 6W M ST HDR Mechanical Security When not used, this
uCLASP 2mm (0.07") connector must have
TH UL9 a loop-back plug
inserted.
J14 Not Fitted.
J15 Not Fitted.
J16 GATT CON_2W_M_ST_HD GAT3/GAT Port This connector
R_St_6mm (0.23") remains accessible
when the logic cage
door is closed.
J17 USB0 CON 7W M ST SATA USB0 Port
Au_15u" TH UL94V
J18 Unused reference.
J19 Not Fitted.
J20 Unused reference.
J21 Not Fitted.
J22 SOFT PWR CON 2W Soft Power Control
J23 Not Fitted.

J24 Not Fitted.
11-15
11.3 Maintenance
CAUTION:
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices such as printed circuit boards
(PCBs), take care to avoid physical contact with components. Do not place
electrostatic sensitive devices on metal surfaces. PCBs should be handled by their
edges. Take care to avoid flexing the PCB, as this may lead to physical damage.
WARNING:
Turn the EGM power off before removing PCBs from the logic cage.
To remove the carrier board:
1. Open the EGM lower main door and switch off the EGM.
2. Open the EGM upper main door.
3. Open the logic cage door.
4. While following standard electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures, lever the PCBA out of
the runners using the board extractors and withdraw the board from the logic cage.
5. Place the PCBA in an antistatic bag immediately.
NOTE:
Place a fault tag on any faulty boards.
Inspect both sides of the replacement PCBA for any signs of physical damage.
11-16
Service Manual Backplane Board
Chapter 12
Backplane Board
12.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 12-3
12.2 Backplane Board.................................................................................... 12-5

12.2.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 12-9

12-1
Backplane Board Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 12-1 Backplane Board ............................................................................................................ 12-3

Figure 12-2 Backplane Board Component Locations ........................................................................ 12-5
List of Tables
Table 12-1 Backplane Connection Function and Type ...................................................................... 12-6
12-2
12.1 Overview
The backplane board connects the carrier board to EGM components.

The backplane board is a single printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) mounted vertically in the
cabinet, at the back of the logic cage. The backplane board is used to electrically connect the
carrier board to all peripheral PCBAs and subsystems.
The carrier board connects directly to the backplane board within the logic cage. The optional
expansion board connects directly to the backplane board, within the logic cage. All other
PCBAs and peripherals are connected to the backplane board via ribbon cables or wire looms.
The board location and the component layout of the backplane board are shown below.
Figure 12-1 Backplane Board Location
3
4
5
1
VILO
GIC_
002
8 7 6
Legend
1 Logic Cage 4 Cage for Jurisdiction- 7 COM Express
Specific Communications (mounted on carrier
board)
2 Backplane Board 5 Hard Disk Drive/Solid 8 Video Board
State Drive (if fitted) (mounted on carrier
board)
3 Logic Cage Door Hinge 6 Carrier Board
(door not shown) (mounted on backplane
board)
12-3

The backplane board provides electrical connection for the following boards and peripherals:
 Amplifier.
 Bank note acceptor (if fitted).
 Carrier board.
 Coin handling (if fitted).
 Edge lighting.
 Expansion board.
 Fan.
 Hopper (if fitted).
 Light tower (if fitted).
 Meters (if fitted).
 Optics.
 Playbuttons.
 PMM (if fitted).
 Power supply.
 Printer (if fitted).
 Progressive jackpot controllers.
 Touch screen.
The backplane board has no active components.
The connectors that require security are placed on the board so that they are within the logic
cage after installation. They are:
 Carrier board connectors (P1, P2 and P3).

 Expansion board connector (P4).
 Electromechanical meters connector (P9).
All connectors are unique in size to prevent incorrect connection.
12-4
12.2 Backplane Board

Component locations and connectors for the backplane board are shown on the figure below.
Figure 12-2 Backplane Board Component Locations
BPLANEBD_001
12-5
12.2.1 Connectors
The following table lists the function and type of each connector on the backplane board.
Table 12-1 Backplane Connection Function and Type
Designator Title Function Connector

P1,P2,P3 Carrier Board Carrier board interconnect 110W 2.0mm (0.08”)
hard metric type A
vertical header
P4 Expansion Market expansion board 110W 2.0mm (0.08”)
Board interconnect hard metric type A
vertical header
P5 Connector Connector expansion 48W DIN41612 half C
Board vertical receptacle
P6 Power Supply Power supply 24W Mini-Fit Jr. dual row

vertical header
P7 Amplifier Amplifier power (24VDC), low 16W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
level audio output (5.1), S/PDIF row vertical header
digital audio output
P8 Mic. Microphone input 3W MicroClasp single
row vertical header
P9 Meters Electromechanical meters (x8), 20W shrouded box
meter illumination LEDs, IrDA, vertical header
meter security switch
P10 Com 0 primary LCD touch screen (Com 9W D-sub standard male
0) vertical header
P11 Playbuttons Playbutton switches (x16) 38W MicroClasp dual

Playbutton LEDs (x16) row vertical header
P12 Door Coin validator, coin diverter 26W MicroClasp dual
solenoid, coin diverter optics, row vertical header
belly door security switch, belly
door fluorescent ballast, main
door optics (also on P22)
P13 Com 8 Feature topbox 8W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
row vertical header
P14 24VDC Auxiliary 24VDC 4W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
row vertical header
P15 Printer Printer (Com 3) 14W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
row vertical header
P16 PMM Player marketing module, PMM 36W MicroClasp dual
fluorescent ballast row vertical header
P17 System System communications (Com 20W MicroClasp dual
2) system security switch row vertical header
P18 Hopper Hopper 12W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
row vertical header
12-6

P19 Topbox Topbox security switch, topbox 32W MicroClasp dual
fluorescent ballast, light tower row vertical header
(SPI Channel 7), oval topper,
jackpot bell output
P20 Progressives Progressive jackpot 14W MicroClasp dual
communications (Com 4) row vertical header
P21 BNA Bank note acceptor (Com 1), 20W Micro-Fit 3.0 dual
BNA stacker security switch row vertical header
P22 Cabinet Meter/audit switch, reset switch, 28W MicroClasp dual
electromechanical meters row vertical header
illumination switch, main door
optics (also on P12), main door
security switch, cashbox
security switch, handle output
P23 Com 7 Com 7 10W MicroClasp dual
row vertical header
P24 Com 5 Com 5 8W MicroClasp dual row
vertical header
P25 I/O Interface Auxiliary carrier board inputs 22W MicroClasp dual
(x4) auxiliary carrier board row vertical header
outputs (x4) auxiliary expansion
board I/O (x8)
P26 Optics Optical security channels 1, 2 12W MicroClasp dual
and 3 row vertical header

row vertical header
P28 SPI 1 SPI channel 1 26W shrouded box
vertical header with latch
row vertical header
P30 SPI 6 Edge lighting (SPI channel 6) 10W shrouded box
vertical header with latch
row vertical header
P32 Fan Logic cage fan 4W MicroClasp single
row vertical header
P33 Power USB peripheral power (GDS 4W Mini-Fit Jr. single row
std.) vertical header (with
custom first make - last
break pins)
break pins)
break pins)
12-7

break pins)
break pins)
P38 USB 5 USB 2.0 port 5 4W USB type A right
angle receptacle
angle receptacle
angle receptacle
angle receptacle
angle receptacle
12-8
12.3 Maintenance
The following procedure is used to maintain the backplane board.
WARNING:
When handling electrostatic devices such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. PCBAs should be handled by their edges. Electrostatic
devices should not be placed on metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCBA, as this may lead to permanent damage.
Refer to Cabinet - Logic Cage for details of the procedure for removing and replacing the
backplane board.
NOTE: A fault tag must be placed on any faulty equipment.
NOTE: Run a complete machine test after replacing the backplane board.
12-9
Notes
12-10
Service Manual Electromechanical Meter Board
Chapter 13
Electromechanical Meter Board

13.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 13-3
13.2 Electromechanical Meter Board ........................................................... 13-5

13.2.1 Overcurrent Protection ......................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.2 Security Interface ................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.3 Meter Detection .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.4 Connector ............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 13-6

13-1
Electromechanical Meter Board Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 13-1 Electromechanical Meter Board ..................................................................................... 13-4
List of Tables
Table 13-1 Meter Specifications ........................................................................................................ 13-3
13-2
13.1 Overview
The electromechanical meters record data in physical format regarding the operation of the
EGM. This data is used for security and accounting purposes.
The electromechanical meter board may be fitted with up to eight meters.
The electromechanical meters are used to record audit information such as games played,
credits won and other data as defined by jurisdictional authorities and customers.
The specifications of the meters are shown in the table below.
Table 13-1 Meter Specifications
Description Specification
Number of digits 7
Rated voltage 24V DC
Power consumption 46mA 1.1W
Operating voltage range 90 to 110% of rated voltage
Count speed 20CPS (standard)
Allowable ripple ratio <10%
Ambient temperature -25°C (-13°F) to 60°C (140°F) operating
Dielectric strength 1500V AC, 50/60Hz for 1 minute
13-3
Figure 13-1 Electromechanical Meter Board
EMB_002
The number of meters used varies according to jurisdictional requirements and unused meters
may be hidden from view.
13-4
13.2 Electromechanical Meter Board

The electromechanical meter board provides
 A physical location for up to eight electromechanical meters.

 A physical location for a tamper switch.
The electromechanical meter board connects directly to the backplane board.
13.2.1 Overcurrent Protection

Power is switched on and off through the meter drive outputs using an intelligent power driver.
The power switch includes built-in overcurrent sensing and protection.
13.2.2 Security Interface

The security interface provides a connection from the electromechanical meter board to a
mechanical security switch to monitor meter accesses.
13.2.3 Meter Detection

The carrier board confirms the presence of each electromechanical meter. The EGM
malfunctions if any of the meters is not detected.
13.2.4 Connector
The electromechanical meter board connector for power and signals is a 20-way ribbon cable.
13-5
13.3 Maintenance
To maintain the electromechanical meter board:

CAUTION:
When handling electrostatic devices such as printed circuit board assemblies
(PCBAs), take care to avoid physical contact with components. PCBAs should be
handled by their edges. Electrostatic devices should not be placed on metal
surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid flexing the PCBA, as this may
lead to permanent damage.
To remove the electromechanical meters kit:

2. Remove the BNA cage (if required).
3. Break the security seal (if fitted) and remove the two nuts that hold the external cover and
viewing window in place on the cast mounting housing. (It may be necessary to remove the
bill acceptor housing to access these nuts).
4. Swivel the cover and window counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
5. Remove the screw that secures the meter assembly to the housing and remove the
assembly.
6. Disconnect the looms from the kit.
7. Unclip the meter board from the bracket (if required).
8. Unclip the light pipe from the meter board (if required).
NOTE:
An EGM fitted with electromechanical meters does not function if they are
disconnected or removed.
13-6
Service Manual Standalone Jackpots
Chapter 14
Standalone Jackpots
14.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 14-3
14-1
Standalone Jackpots Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 14-1 Standalone Jackpots Block Diagram .............................................................................. 14-3
14-2
Service Manual Standalone Jackpots
14.1 Overview
Standalone jackpots affect individual EGMs. The standalone jackpot controller system is located
within the EGM.
The jackpot pool starts out at a set amount, which is called the start-up amount. The jackpot
pool is then incremented by a certain percentage of every bet made. The current value of the
jackpot pool is displayed on the topbox LCD screen (if fitted).
When a jackpot trigger occurs, the jackpot pool may be won. These triggers vary depending on
the installed game and jurisdiction. Jackpot triggers may include:
 A combination of symbols on the screen.

 A feature event that may give the player a chance to win bonuses or the jackpot. Feature
events may be triggered randomly or by a combination of symbols.
14.2 Block Diagram

The block diagram below applies to all standalone jackpots for all communications systems.
Figure 14-1 Standalone Jackpots Block Diagram
Topbox
Cabinet
P6 J27
Backplane
Board
Video
Board
EGM
Power Supply
SAJPWS_001
14-3
Standalone Jackpots Service Manual
Notes
14-4
Service Manual Hyperlink and Mystery Jackpots
Chapter 15
Hyperlink™ and Mystery Jackpots
15.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 15-3

15.1.1 Hyperlink Jackpots ............................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.2 Mystery Jackpots.................................................................................................. 15-3
15.2 Block Diagrams ...................................................................................... 15-4
15-1
Hyperlink and Mystery Jackpots Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 15-1 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted).................................................. 15-4
Figure 15-2 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted)............................................... 15-5
Figure 15-3 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (if fitted) .......................................................... 15-6
Figure 15-4 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted) ............................................... 15-7
Figure 15-5 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted) ................................................ 15-8
Figure 15-6 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - ASP (if fitted) .............................................................. 15-9
Figure 15-7 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted) ............................................. 15-10
Figure 15-8 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted) ........... 15-11
Figure 15-9 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted) ........ 15-12
Figure 15-10 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (if fitted) .................. 15-13
Figure 15-11 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted) ....... 15-14
Figure 15-12 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted)........ 15-15
Figure 15-13 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - ASP (if fitted) ...................... 15-16
Figure 15-14 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted) ....... 15-17
Figure 15-15 Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Worldbase (if fitted) ................................... 15-18
15-2
15.1 Overview
Hyperlink and mystery jackpots link a group of EGMs through an external jackpot controller. The
jackpot pool starts out at a set amount, which is called the start-up amount. The jackpot pool is
then incremented by a certain percentage of every bet made. When a jackpot trigger occurs, the
jackpot pool may be won.
15.1.1 Hyperlink Jackpots

The current value of the jackpot pool is displayed on the topbox LCD screen (if fitted), overhead
graphics displays (if a graphics server is fitted) or both, depending on configuration and
jurisdiction.
The jackpot trigger for a Hyperlink jackpot is a feature event that gives the player a chance to
win bonuses or the jackpot. Feature events can be triggered randomly or by a combination of
symbols.
15.1.2 Mystery Jackpots

The jackpot controller randomly selects a value in a specified range. The jackpot is triggered on
an EGM when it causes the jackpot pool to reach this amount.
The current value of the jackpot pool is shown on the overhead graphical display if a graphics
server is fitted.
15-3
15.2 Block Diagrams

The block diagrams for Hyperlink and mystery jackpot systems are as follows.
Figure 15-1 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103
P6 J27 SPC2 Board
J16
Backplane
Board P17
5V DC Converter
Board
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
Power Supply SEI out
SEI in
To SEI In Port of the

HMJPWSSAS_001
Next EGM in the Bank
15-4
Figure 15-2 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103 P1 and P3 used for SPC2.5 (ASP)

P2 and P4 used for SPC2.5 (Worldbase)
P6 J27 P1 P2 P3 P4
J16 SPC2.5
Backplane Board
Board P17 J3
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in
HMJPWSSAS_SPC2-5_001
15-5
Figure 15-3 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (if fitted)
Topbox
Cabinet
Backplane
Board
Video
Board Fibre Optic
Board
EGM
Power Supply
HMJPWSQCOM_001
15-6
Figure 15-4 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted)
15-7
Figure 15-5 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted)
15-8
Figure 15-6 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - ASP (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103
H0
P6 J27
J16
Backplane
Board P17
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in

HMJPWSASP_001
15-9
Figure 15-7 Hyperlink - LCD Game Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted)
Topbox
Cabinet
Backplane SEI Power

Board Board
Video LAB
Board Board
SEI Board
EGM PSIM
Power Supply
SEI out
SEI in
To SEI In Port of the HMJPWSLAB_001

Option
15-10
Figure 15-8 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2) (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103
P6 J27 SPC2 Board
J16
Backplane
Board P17
5V DC Converter
Board
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in

HMJPWSSAS_002
15-11
Figure 15-9 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - SAS (SPC2.5) (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P6 J27 P1 P2 P3 P4
J16 SPC2.5
Backplane Board
Board P17 J3
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in
HMJPWSSAS_SPC2-5_002
15-12
Figure 15-10 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (if fitted)
Topbox
Cabinet
Backplane
Board
Video
Board Fibre Optic
Board
EGM
Power Supply
HMJPWSQCOM_002
15-13
Figure 15-11 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (NCC) (if fitted)
15-14
Figure 15-12 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - QCOM (VLC) (if fitted)
15-15
Figure 15-13 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - ASP (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103
H0
P6 J27
J16
Backplane
Board P17
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in

HMJPWSASP_002
15-16
Figure 15-14 Hyperlink and Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Xseries (LAB) (if fitted)
Topbox
Cabinet
Backplane SEI Power

Board Board
Video LAB
Board Board
SEI Board
EGM PSIM
Power Supply
SEI out
SEI in
To SEI In Port of the HMJPWSLAB_002

Option
15-17
Figure 15-15 Mystery - LCD Graphics Server Display - Worldbase (if fitted)
Option
Topbox
Cabinet
J103
P103
P6 J27 P1 P2 P3 P4
J16 SPC2.5
Backplane Board
Board J3
P20
Video
Board
SEI Board
EGM
SEI in Power
HMJPWSMysteryWB_001
15-18
Service Manual Communications Interface Board
Chapter 16
Communications Interface Board
16.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 16-3
16.2 Communications Interface Board......................................................... 16-3
16.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 16-4

16-1
Communications Interface Board Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 16-1 Communications Interface Board - Component Layout .................................................. 16-3

Figure 16-2 Communications Interface Board - Mounting ................................................................. 16-4
16-2
Service Manual Communications Interface Board
16.1 Overview
The communications interface board converts RS232 signals from the carrier board to
RS422/RS485 signals required by external systems.
It also provides protection against electrical interference from external sources, including
Ethernet and RS485 signals that are located at the bottom rear of the back wall of the cabinet.
16.2 Communications Interface Board

The communications interface board diagram is shown below.
Figure 16-1 Communications Interface Board - Component Layout
COMMSBD_001
16-3
Communications Interface Board Service Manual
16.3 Maintenance
To maintain the communications interface board:

 Check that all connectors are secure and in good condition.

The communications interface board is located at the bottom rear of the back wall of the cabinet.
It is located inside a metal housing.
To remove the communications interface board:

2. Remove the looms from the board.
3. Remove the hopper (if fitted).
4. Remove the screw (bottom center) that holds the metal cover over the board.
5. Lift up the cover until it is clear of the locating tab at the rear and remove.
6. Remove the communications interface board from the snap-top standoffs on the holding
plate at the rear of the cabinet. (There are no screws holding the board to the plate.)
Figure 16-2 Communications Interface Board - Mounting
VICOMMS_001
FOI board components(if fitted) are mounted on the same plate. (Shown grey in the diagram
above.)
16-4
Service Manual Serial Protocol Converter
Chapter 17
Serial Protocol Converter

17.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 17-3
17.2 SPC2 Converter Kit (if fitted) ................................................................ 17-3

17.2.1 SPC2 Board ......................................................................................................... 17-4
17.2.2 DC Converter Board ............................................................................................. 17-9
17.3 SPC2.5 Converter Kit (if fitted) ........................................................... 17-10

17.3.1 SPC2.5 Board .................................................................................................... 17-10
17.4 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 17-14

17.4.1 Removal and Replacement Procedure .............................................................. 17-14
17-1
Serial Protocol Converter Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 17-1 SPC2 Kit with SPC2 Board and DC Converter Board .................................................... 17-3
Figure 17-2 SPC2 Board ................................................................................................................... 17-4
Figure 17-3 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2 ...................................................................................... 17-5
Figure 17-4 EGM with SPC2 ............................................................................................................. 17-6
Figure 17-5 DC Converter Board Detail............................................................................................. 17-9
Figure 17-6 SPC2.5 Board .............................................................................................................. 17-10
Figure 17-7 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2.5 Protocol Converter ................................................... 17-12
Figure 17-8 EGM with SPC2.5 Protocol Converter ......................................................................... 17-13
List of Tables
Table 17-1 SPC2 LED Operation ...................................................................................................... 17-4
Table 17-2 SPC2 Board Connectors ................................................................................................. 17-7
Table 17-3 DC Converter Board Microfit Connectors ........................................................................ 17-9
Table 17-4 SPC2.5 LED Operation ................................................................................................. 17-11
Table 17-5 SPC2.5 Board Connectors and Pinouts ........................................................................ 17-13
17-2
17.1 Overview
The serial protocol converter is an interface that enables Aristocrat™ serial protocol (ASP)
RS485 signals used in the EGM to be converted and made available to be interfaced to SAS-
RS232 compatible devices such as central monitoring and control systems.
The SPC assembly (kit) can slide into the expansion slot into logic cage for security purpose or
can be mounted on the top of the logic cage, depending on other components installed and
jurisdictional requirements.
17.2 SPC2 Converter Kit (if fitted)

The SPC2 converter kit includes:
 SPC2 board.
 DC converter 24V to 5V 500mA board.
Figure 17-1 SPC2 Kit with SPC2 Board and DC Converter Board
SPCKIT_001
Legend
1 SPC2 Board 2 DC Converter Board
17-3
17.2.1 SPC2 Board

The SPC2 board converts the ASP protocol used by the EGM to the SAS protocol used by
some external systems.
The H2 connector on the SPC2 board connects to PSIM on the Paltronics SEI board (if
Hyperlink™ is fitted) or to P15 on the backplane board using an RS232 interface. The H4
connector on the SPC2 board provides the interface to the SAS-RS232 compatible device.
Figure 17-2 SPC2 Board
SPCBD_006
LED Operations
The LED is located at L1 near the main processor on the SPC2 board. It reveals the status of
the board to the operator. The LED has a variety of flashing sequences listed in the table below.
Table 17-1 SPC2 LED Operation
Flashing Sequence Meaning

Flashes twice repeatedly on Power up and normal operation - the RAM has been cleared
start-up and the board is polling the EGM and the MCS.
Flashes continuously The board is operating normally.
Flashes once repeatedly at a Communication with EGM on port H2 has been lost.
slow rate
Flashes twice repeatedly Communication on port H3 does not exist.
Flashes three times repeatedly Communication with SAS device on port H4 has been lost.
Flashes four times repeatedly The non-volatile RAM is corrupt and needs to be reset (refer
to the RAM Clearing section).
Flashes five times repeatedly The EGM address is not set.
Flashes five times for a short The RAM has been cleared.
period
17-4
RAM Clearing
When the non-volatile RAM is corrupt, clear the RAM manually using the following procedure:
1. Open the door(s) as required and turn off the EGM.

2. Disconnect the cable from port H8 on the SPC2 board.
3. Put in the jumper pin on 11 and 13 of plug J2 on the SPC2 board.
4. Connect the cable to port H8 on the SPC2 board. The LED flashes four times and then
flashes repeatedly.
5. Disconnect the cable from port H8 on the SPC2 board.
6. Remove the jumper on pin 11 and 13 of plug J2 on the SPC2 board.
7. Connect the cable to port H8 on the SPC2 board. The LED now flashes two times and then
flashes repeatedly. Normal operation resumes.
Block Diagrams
Block diagrams showing EGMs with and without Paltronics Hyperlink jackpot controller systems
are shown below.
Figure 17-3 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2
J103
P103
J16
Backplane
Board P17
5V DC Converter
Board
ASP RS232
SPCBD_004
SEI Board
RS485 Hyperlink Controller
EGM to EGM
17-5
Figure 17-4 EGM with SPC2
J103
P103
SPC2 Board
J16
Backplane
Board P17
5V DC Converter
Board
SPCBD_005
17-6
Connectors
Connectors are listed in the table below for both Paltronic Hyperlink and non-Hyperlink systems.
Table 17-2 SPC2 Board Connectors
Connector Used For Description

Paltronics SEI Board P1 Hyperlink The P1 connector (10-way
Connector Honda connector) on the
Paltronics SEI board connects to
P15 serial 2 connector on the
backplane board when Hyperlink
is fitted.
Backplane Board P15 Hyperlink The P15 serial 2 connector on
Connector the backplane board (16-way
MiniFit Jr receptacle) connects
to P1 on the SEI board and J2
on the DC converter board when
Hyperlink is fitted.
Backplane Board P15 Non-Hyperlink The P15 serial 2 connector on
Connector the backplane board (16-way
MiniFit Jr receptacle) connects
to H2 on the SPC2 board and J2
on the DC converter board when
Hyperlink is not fitted.
DC Converter Board J2 Both The J2 connector on the DC
Connector converter board (4-way Microfit
connector) connects to P15 on
the backplane board.
DC Converter Board J4 Both The J4 DC converter board
Connector connector (6-way Microfit
receptacle) connects to H8 on
the SPC2 board.
SPC2 Board H2 Connector Non-Hyperlink The H2 connector on the SPC2
board (5-way Mascon connector)
connects to P15 on the
backplane board when Hyperlink
is not fitted.
SPC2 Board H2 Connector Hyperlink The H2 connector on the SPC2
board (5-way Mascon connector)
connects to PSIM on the
Paltronics SEI Board via solder
sleeves 1, 2 and 3 when
Solder Sleeve 1 Hyperlink with SPC2 or Solder sleeve 1 connects to
Venue Head System PSIM on the SEI board and J1
on the venue head system or H2
on the SPC2 board when
17-7

Venue Head System J1 Hyperlink Venue Head The J1 connector on the venue
Connector System head system (if fitted) (10-way
Honda connector) connects to
PSIM on the Paltronics SEI
board for Hyperlink via solder
sleeves 1, 2 and 3.
SEI Board PSIM Connector Hyperlink with SPC2 or The PSIM connector on the SEI
Venue Head System board (10-way Honda connector)
connects to H2 on the SPC2
board or J1 on the venue head
system via solder sleeves 1, 2
and 3 when Hyperlink is fitted.
SPC2 Board H8 Connector The H8 connector on the SPC2
board connects to J4 on the DC
converter board.
SPC2 Board H4 Connector The H4 SPC2 connector
provides SAS-protocol output.
17-8
17.2.2 DC Converter Board

The DC converter board converts 24V DC to 5V DC to power the SPC2 board. The SPC2 board
and the DC converter board are mounted on the same metal plate.
Figure 17-5 DC Converter Board Detail
SPCDC_001
The board is fitted with four Microfit connectors, which are shown in the table below.
Table 17-3 DC Converter Board Microfit Connectors
Connector Description
J1 Inputs power to the DC converter board - requires 24V at 1A. Usually
connected to the backplane board or the power supply.
J2 Connects in parallel with J1.
J3 Not used.
J4 Supplies a regulated 5V DC to a maximum of 500mA (300 mA required).
17-9
17.3 SPC2.5 Converter Kit (if fitted)

The SPC2.5 converter kit includes the SPC2.5 board.
17.3.1 SPC2.5 Board

The SPC2.5 board converts the ASP protocol used by the EGM to the SAS protocol used by
some external systems.
The EGM is always connected to P1 connector of the SPC2.5 board via the appropriate
harness. The P3 connector connects to account system which is primary system port. The P2
connector for the secondary system port gets active when the dual port option is selected on the
EGM. This port is generally used when connecting a secondary system such as an EZ-Pay
system. The P4 connector is currently not used.
Figure 17-6 SPC2.5 Board
SPCBD_001
17-10
LED Operations
The SPC2.5 board has a yellow LED (main and transmit), a green LED (receive) and a red LED
(warning).
LEDs function is to reveal the status of the board to the operator. The LED flashing sequences
are listed in the table below.
Table 17-4 SPC2.5 LED Operation
Flashing Sequence Meaning

Yellow LED flashes regularly SPC2.5 is operating normally.
Yellow LED (main) flashes five Communication between ports (ASP on COMM1 (P1) and
on/off cycles per second primary port (SAS on COMM3 (P3)) is successful.
Yellow LED flashes one time No communication on port 1.
repeatedly
Yellow LED flashes two times No communication on port 2.
repeatedly
Yellow LED flashes three No communication on port 3.
times repeatedly
Yellow LED (main) flashes four Memory was not initialised properly. Clear non-volatile
times repeatedly memory (refer to the RAM Clearing section).
Yellow LED (main) flashes five The SAS address ID on the primary/secondary port is badly
times repeatedly configured.
Flashes with fast flickering Non-volatile memory has been cleared. Remove the shorting
link from the CLR jumper.
Red LED flashes very quickly The on-board battery is sufficiently charged.
every five seconds
Red LED flashes once every The battery voltage level is low. Replace battery.
second with 50% duty cycle
RAM Clearing
The SPC2.5 board uses a battery-backed SRAM device to hold meters and events received
from the EGM.
Memory initialization is required when:
 The SPC2.5 is used first time.

 New firmware is installed.
The firmware has an internal mechanism that detects such events and indicates that RAM
clearing is required by flashing main yellow LED four times.
To manually clear the non-volatile RAM:
1. Open the door(s) as required and turn off the EGM.

2. Insert a shorting link on the CLR jumper (J8) on the SPC2.5 board.
3. Power up the board to initialise the RAM (indicated by quick flashing of the LED).
4. Remove the link from the SPC2.5 board. Normal operation resumes.
17-11
Block Diagrams
Block diagrams showing EGMs with and without Paltronics Hyperlink jackpot controller systems
are shown below.
Figure 17-7 EGM with Hyperlink and SPC2.5 Protocol Converter
J103
P1 P2 P3 P4
J16 SPC2.5
Backplane Board
Board P17 J3
ASP RS232
SEI Board
RS485 Hyperlink Controller
EGM to EGM
SPCBD_002
17-12
Figure 17-8 EGM with SPC2.5 Protocol Converter
J103
P103
P1 and P3 used for SPC2.5 (ASP)
P1 P2 P3 P4
J16 SPC2.5
Backplane Board
Board P17
J3
SPCBD_003
Connectors
Connectors for the SPC2.5 board are listed in the table below.
Table 17-5 SPC2.5 Board Connectors and Pinouts

J3 Power Supply +24V The J3 connector (4 way connector) connects EGM
to the 24V power connector on the backplane board.
P1 UART Port1 The P1 connector (5 way connector) connects to the
serial port on the backplane board.
secondary system.
primary system.
17-13
17.4 Maintenance
To maintain the SPC board:
CAUTION:
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices such as PCBs, take care to avoid
physical contact with components. Handle PCBs by their edges. Do not place
electrostatic sensitive devices on metal surfaces. Take care to avoid flexing the
PCB. Flexing may cause physical damage.

To remove the SPC board from the EGM:
2. Locate the SPC board. It is either mounted on top of the logic cage or in the jurisdictional
slot inside the logic cage.
3. If it is mounted on top of the logic cage:
Remove the metal bracket supporting the SPC board from the top of the logic cage by
depressing the tags on the four plastic clips.
Or
If it is mounted inside the logic cage:
Remove the SPC assembly from the logic cage using the board extractors to slide the
assembly out.
4. Disconnect all looms from the boards.
5. Remove the SPC board.
NOTE:
Ensure that the security switch contacts are closed when the interface cover is
replaced.
CAUTION:
The SPC board must not be pushed into position - use the board extractors to cam
the board back into position.
17-14
Service Manual Machine Fault Finding
Chapter 18
Machine Fault Finding

18.1 Machine Alerts ....................................................................................... 18-3
18.2 Message Displays and Conditions ....................................................... 18-4

18.2.1 Cabinet ................................................................................................................. 18-4
18.2.2 Power ................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.2.3 Coin Handling (if fitted) ......................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.4 Hopper (if fitted).................................................................................................... 18-9
18.2.5 Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted) ............................................................................. 18-10
18.2.6 Printer (if fitted) ................................................................................................... 18-11
18.2.7 LCD Screens ...................................................................................................... 18-12
18.2.8 Electronic Meters................................................................................................ 18-13
18.3 Reset Messages ................................................................................... 18-14
18-1
Machine Fault Finding Service Manual
List of Tables
Table 18-1 Fault Finding - Lamps and LEDs ..................................................................................... 18-4

Table 18-2 Fault Finding - Feature Topbox Lighting .......................................................................... 18-5
Table 18-3 Fault Finding – Sound ..................................................................................................... 18-6
Table 18-4 Fault Finding - Power ...................................................................................................... 18-7
Table 18-5 Fault Finding - Coin Handling .......................................................................................... 18-8
Table 18-6 Fault Finding - Hopper..................................................................................................... 18-9
Table 18-7 Fault Finding - Bank Note Acceptor............................................................................... 18-10
Table 18-8 Fault Finding – Printer ................................................................................................... 18-11
Table 18-9 Fault Finding - Main LCD Screen .................................................................................. 18-12
Table 18-10 Fault Finding - Topbox LCD Screen ............................................................................ 18-13
Table 18-11 Fault Finding - Electronic Audit Meters ........................................................................ 18-13
Table 18-12 Fault Finding - Messages ............................................................................................ 18-14
18-2
18.1 Machine Alerts

The Aristocrat™ electronic gaming machine (EGM) uses a number of machine conditions and
messages to alert the operator to security, customer service and maintenance events. When an
event occurs, the EGM responds by displaying messages, locking up and sounding an alarm. If
the EGM is fitted with a bank note acceptor, the bank note entry LEDs indicate some EGM
conditions.
During the EGM setup, configuration of some EGM functions and operational controls takes
place. Refer to the Machine Modes chapter for more information.
NOTE:
Alerts and messages can vary depending on jurisdictions and game.
18-3
18.2 Message Displays and Conditions

Common faults, associated lockup conditions (where applicable) and procedures for correcting
each fault are detailed in this section.
18.2.1 Cabinet
The following sections cover fault finding procedures for the components attached to the
cabinet.
Lamps and LEDs

This table describes faults that may occur with lamps and LEDs and the actions to be taken if
such faults occur.
Table 18-1 Fault Finding - Lamps and LEDs
Fault Probable Cause Action

Fluorescent lamps, A lamp, LED or fluorescent Replace the fluorescent
animation lamp, LEDs and/or driver is faulty. tube, fluorescent driver,
playbutton LEDs are not lit. animation lamp, playbutton
LED or microswitch.
The power supply assembly Check that the power supply
is faulty. assembly is operating
correctly. If not, replace the
power supply assembly.
The loom between the Check cables and looms and
fluorescent lights and the ensure that lights and lamps
power supply assembly is are correctly seated.
faulty.
The connection between the Check that cables, looms,
playbutton LEDs and boards, lamps and LEDs are
backplane board is faulty. correctly seated and have
The connection between the continuity.
power supply assembly and
the backplane board is faulty.
The connection between the
carrier board and backplane
board is faulty.
The carrier board is faulty. Replace the carrier board.
18-4
Feature Topbox Lighting

This table describes faults that may occur with the feature topbox lighting and the actions to be
taken if such faults occur.
Table 18-2 Fault Finding - Feature Topbox Lighting

A light strip on the left or The loom between the light Check that the loom is
right side of the feature strip and the light driver correctly seated and
topbox does not light up. board is faulty. physically sound.
The light strip has burned Replace the light strip.

out. (Refer to the Cabinet
Chapter - Feature Topbox
and LCD sction.)
The light driver board is Replace the light driver
faulty. board. (Refer to the Cabinet
and LCD section.)
A light strip on the top of the The loom between the light Check that the loom is
feature topbox does not light strip and the LED lighting correctly seated and
up. board is faulty. physically sound.
The light strip has burned Replace the light strip.
out. (Refer to the Cabinet
and LCD sction.)
The LED lighting board is Replace the LED lighting
faulty. board. (Refer to the Cabinet
and LCD section.)
18-5
Sound
This table describes faults that may occur with sound and the actions to be taken if such faults
occur.
Table 18-3 Fault Finding – Sound

Sound is too loud or too soft. The volume is set too high Adjust the volume from
or low. The volume needs Operator Mode Menu >
to be adjusted. Operator Setup/Selections >
Sound System Setup.
The backplane board is Replace the backplane board.

faulty.
There is no sound. The volume is set too low. Adjust the volume from
The volume needs to be Operator Mode Menu >
adjusted. Operator Setup/Selections >
Sound System Setup.
There is an open circuit in Remove the connectors from
the speaker. the speaker terminals and
check that there is 6-10Ω
across the speaker terminals.
If not, replace the speaker and
reconnect the speaker
terminals.
The loom between the If there is no power at the
backplane board and the speaker, check that the looms
speaker is faulty. are correctly seated and
physically sound.
The backplane board is Replace the backplane board.
faulty.
18-6
18.2.2 Power
This table describes faults that may occur during power up and the actions to be taken if such
faults occur.
Table 18-4 Fault Finding - Power

The EGM has no power. The mains socket supplying Check that the mains socket
the EGM is not live. is live. If the mains socket is
dead, check that the circuit
breaker on the distribution
board is in the on position.
The carrier board is not Turn off mains power for five
showing two lit red LEDs (i.e. seconds then turn power on.
sequential display). Check the carrier board's
seating and links. If the
condition persists, replace
the carrier board.
There is no power-up cycle. There is a coin jam in the Clear the coin jam from the
coin chute assembly. coin chute assembly.
The hopper photo-optic Check that the hopper
detector is faulty. photo-optic detector is not
damaged or disconnected.
Replace the detector if it is
damaged.
A loom is faulty. Check that the looms are
correctly seated and have
continuity.
The backplane board is Replace the backplane
faulty. board.
Equipment is connected to The auxiliary power socket Replace the auxiliary power
the auxiliary power socket fuse is blown. socket fuse.
but has no power.
18-7
18.2.3 Coin Handling (if fitted)

This table describes faults that may occur with coin handling assembly and the actions to be
Table 18-5 Fault Finding - Coin Handling

A Yoyo message displays A coin is jammed in the coin Remove the jammed coin.
while the EGM is not being validator.
played. The loom between the coin Check that the loom is
validator and the backplane correctly seated and has
board is faulty. continuity.
The coin validator is faulty. Replace the coin validator.
A Coin Acceptor Fault Coins are jammed in coin Remove the coin jam.
or Coin Optic Fault validator.
message displays. The loom between the coin Check that the looms are
validator and backplane correctly seated and have
board or the coin validator continuity.
PCBA and the sensor
assembly is faulty.
Coins are accepted by the The loom between the coin Check that the loom is
validator but not registered validator and the backplane correctly seated and has
on the credit meter and the board is faulty. continuity.
EGM locks up. The coin validator is faulty. Replace the coin validator.
Coins are jamming in the The coin diverter is jamming. Adjust the position of the
diverter window. diverter.
Coins are jamming at the top There is a coin jam at the top Remove the coin validator.
of the coin chute. of the coin chute. Open the debris flap and
remove any jammed coins.
Rejected coins are not falling Coins are jammed in the Carefully clear the reject
into the coin tray. reject chute. chute.
Coins are continually The coin validator is not Check that the validator has
rejected. receiving power. power.
The coin validator is faulty. Remove any blockage or
debris from the validator.
Replace the validator if the
condition persists.
18-8
18.2.4 Hopper (if fitted)

This table describes faults that may occur with the hopper and the actions to be taken if such
faults occur.
Table 18-6 Fault Finding - Hopper

There is an Illegal Coin The hopper photo-optic Clean the hopper photo-optic
Out message on power-up. detector/emitter is dirty. detector/emitter.
The hopper is faulty. Run a hopper test to check
that the hopper motor stops
when the correct number of
coins has been ejected. If
not, replace the hopper.
The hopper does not rotate. The loom between the Check that the loom is
hopper and the backplane correctly seated and has
board is faulty. continuity.
The hopper motor is faulty. Replace the hopper.
The hopper motor is running The hopper disc is binding. Remove the hopper,
slowly. dismantle it and remove any
foreign matter.
The motor spindle is bent. Replace the hopper.
The motor spindle is bent or
the motor controller is faulty.
All coins are going to the The hopper probe is shorted Clear the short.
cashbox and the hopper is to ground.
empty. The coin diverter solenoid on Run a coin chuting test to
the coin chute assembly is check that the solenoid has
faulty. power.
The coin diverter is jamming. Adjust the position of the
coin diverter.
The diverter solenoid is not Check that the solenoid has
working. power.
Check that the coin diverter
has not jammed.
Check that the hopper probe
is not permanently grounded.
A coin jam fails to clear. The coin exit is obstructed. Ensure that the coin exit is
clear.
There is an incorrect coin in Ensure that no incorrect
the hopper. coins are in the hopper bowl.
There is a bent coin in the Ensure that no bent coins
hopper. are in the hopper bowl.
The motor fails to run. The EGM is not connected to Check the EGM power
power or the fuse is blown. supply and fuse.
The internal thermal cut-out Switch the power off and wait
switch has tripped. 30 seconds before turning
power back on.
Too many coins are paid out. There is dirt or dust in the Check the opto/coin exit area
opto/coin exit area. for dirt and dust.
18-9

Too few coins are paid out. There are not enough coins Ensure the hopper contains
in the hopper. enough coins.
The hopper connections are Check and reseat
faulty. connections to hopper.
18.2.5 Bank Note Acceptor (if fitted)

This table describes faults that may occur with the bank note acceptor (BNA) and the actions to
be taken if such faults occur.
Table 18-7 Fault Finding - Bank Note Acceptor

Bank notes repeatedly skew The pressure rollers have Make adjustments to the
and jam. incorrect tension. roller tension.
The transport belts are not Make adjustments to the
adjusted properly. transport belts.
Bank notes are not The BNA is not receiving Ensure that all leads are
transported into the unit. power. correctly connected and that
power has been turned on.
The BNA has been inhibited Remove any current EGM
from further operation by the lockups.
EGM software.
There is a jam in the bank Open the BNA and remove
note path. the obstruction from the
channel.
Display electronics are not The BNA is not receiving Ensure that all leads are
functioning. power. correctly connected and that
power has been turned on.
18-10
18.2.6 Printer (if fitted)

This table describes faults that may occur with printers and the actions to be taken if such faults
occur.
Table 18-8 Fault Finding – Printer

A Printer Fault The printer has detected an Open the main door, service
message displays. internal fault. the printer and close the
main door.
A Printer Disconnected The printer cable is Check that the printer loom
message displays. disconnected or the printer is is connected correctly. If it is,
not responding. turn the EGM off and on.
A Printer Paper The tickets have been Open the main door, refill the
Depleted message depleted. ticket tray and close the
displays. main door.
A Printer Paper Low The tickets are low. (This is a Open the main door, refill the
message displays. non-lockup fault.) ticket tray or adjust the
tickets low sensor and close
the main door.
The printer does not function The tray is not fully closed Close the tray.
when turned on.
The printer is not plugged in. Check that printer cables are
properly connected on both
ends.
Check that the host and the
power supply are getting
power.
The receipt does not come A ticket is jammed in the Open the tray and clear any
out all the way. printer. jammed tickets.
The printer starts to print but A ticket is jammed in the Open the tray and clear any
stops while the ticket is being printer. jammed tickets.
printed.
The print is light or spotty. The tickets are loaded Check that tickets are loaded
incorrectly. properly.
Low-quality tickets are Use recommended thermal
loaded in the printer. tickets.
The thermal print head is Clean the print head at
dirty. recommended intervals.
A vertical column of print is The ticket thermal coating is Change the ticket stack to
missing on one side or faulty. make sure the thermal
portion of the ticket has not coating is not the source.
been printed. The printer electronics are Replace the printer.
faulty.
18-11
18.2.7 LCD Screens

The following sections describe fault finding procedures for the main LCD screen and the topbox
LCD screen (if fitted).
Main LCD Screen

This table describes faults that may occur with the main LCD screen and the actions to be taken
if such faults occur.
Table 18-9 Fault Finding - Main LCD Screen

The LCD screen is blank. The EGM is in power save Check if EGM is in power
mode. save mode. (Main LCD
screen is also off.)
The LCD screen is faulty. Check that power is available
at the LCD screen. If so,
replace the LCD screen.
The loom between the LCD Check that the looms are
screen and the power supply correctly seated and have
or between the carrier board continuity.
and the LCD screen is faulty.
The carrier board is faulty. If the condition persists,
replace the carrier board.
The power lead is faulty. Check that the green LED on
the LCD controller panel is
illuminated. If not, check the
power lead.
The power supply assembly Check that mains power is
is faulty. available at the power
supply.
The LCD screen displays the The signal loom between the Check that the loom is
message No Signal. LCD screen and backplane correctly seated.
board is faulty.
The carrier board is faulty or Check that the carrier board
incorrectly seated. is correctly seated and
replace the board if
necessary.
The LCD screen colour or The LCD screen settings are Perform the tests located at
picture is incorrect. incorrect. Operator Mode Menu >
Test Menu. (Refer to the
Machine Modes chapter)
Adjust using the on-screen
display.
The LCD screen is faulty. Replace the LCD screen.
18-12
Topbox LCD Screen

This table describes faults that may occur with the topbox LCD screen and the actions to be
Table 18-10 Fault Finding - Topbox LCD Screen

The topbox LCD screen does The game software cannot Check that the green LED on
not function and a Topbox initialise the topbox LCD the LCD controller panel is
Monitor Disconnected screen. illuminated. If not, check the
message is displayed on the power lead.
main LCD screen. Check the video cable
connection. If the connection
is sound, replace the topbox
LCD.
18.2.8 Electronic Meters

This table describes faults that may occur with the electronic meters and the actions to be taken
if such faults occur.
Table 18-11 Fault Finding - Electronic Audit Meters

3 Way Metering Error Inconsistent data across all Perform a memory reset
message. three electronic audit meter (refer to the Machine Modes
sets. chapter - Reset Procedure
section).
18-13
18.3 Reset Messages

The table below describes messages displayed when the EGM is powered up or restarted,
together with the associated lockup condition (if applicable) and the procedure for correcting the
fault.
Table 18-12 Fault Finding - Messages
Message Probable Cause Action

(Attention, Error, Fault)
Panic Messages: A software failure has Contact your authorised
One from a number of different occurred. The EGM service organisation.
messages (e.g. Uninitialized automatically resets and
Exception Vector) can display restarts. The event is
for a few seconds followed by the registered in the panic log
message: (refer to the Machine
Watchdog Reset Modes chapter).
AVL media not present. The CompactFlash card is Replace the
AVL media header error. faulty. CompactFlash card.
AVL media checksum error.
Market AVL media header
error!
Market AVL media checksum
error!
Game Version incompatible.
String not found. The required string is not Contact your authorised
on the CompactFlash. service organisation.
Audit Mode - Turn Audit The meter/audit key was After powering up, turn
Key ON turned on when the EGM the meter/audit key to
was powered down. audit.
No smart card inserted, The smart card has not Insert the smart card.
waiting for card insertion been inserted.
Smart card signature The smart card is not a Insert a valid Aristocrat
verification failed valid Aristocrat smart card. smart card.
Could not authenticate The smart card does not Insert a valid smart
smart card match the game software card that matches the
or is faulty. game software.
Operating system not found The CompactFlash is faulty Insert or replace the
or missing. CompactFlash card.
18-14
Service Manual Glossary
Glossary
Accounting meters An electronic and electromechanical means of storing and displaying
statistical data within the EGM. Typical information includes Total In,
Total Out, Combined Drop, Attendant Paid etc.
ASP Aristocrat Serial Protocol. A communications protocol used by the
EGM to communicate internally.
Assembly A group of components that is used to perform a specific task.
Attendant An employee with responsibilities to verify and pay jackpots.
Attract mode If active, following a specific period of inactivity the EGM may display
graphics, flash lamps or play music to attract potential players.
Audit mode An EGM mode in which the Operator Mode menu displays.
Backplane board A printed circuit board that enables connection between EGM
components and the carrier board.
Ballast A device that limits the electrical current flowing into a component.
BNA Bank note acceptor. An assembly that examines currency or
coupons and communicates the value to the EGM. Accepted items
register as credits and rejected items are returned to the player.
BNA bezel The outer trim of the BNA that accepts bank notes.
Bank note stacker A device that holds bank notes that have been inserted into the
EGM.
Base A specially designed box unit on which the cabinet stands. The
cashbox is usually located securely within the base.
Baud A measure of data transfer rate on a serial channel. One baud
equals one bit per second.
Belly door A door underneath the mid trim that provides access to the belly
panel artwork, the belly panel lighting system and the bank note
stacker.
Bonus A reward for playing the maximum wager.
Cabinet The major casing that houses EGM components.
Calibration A procedure that ensures the accuracy of EGM equipment.
Cancel credit A procedure that allows the attendant to pay a player manually when
the credit amount is greater than the amount that the EGM can pay
out automatically.
Card reader A device used to read smart cards, CompactFlash cards or magnetic
cards.
Carrier board An assembly that provides central control for the EGM.
Cash out An action by a player that transfers credits to a player’s card,
converts credits to cash or converts credits to payable vouchers.
Cashbox A receptacle that holds coins that are in excess of what the hopper
can hold.
CCFL Cold cathode fluorescent lighting. A light source used to light up
artwork panels.
Checksum The result of an arithmetic operation on bits to verify the integrity of
data.
G-1
Glossary Service Manual
Coin handling assembly A device that checks and accepts valid coins and sends their
currency value to the EGM. Accepted items register as credits and
rejected items are returned to the player.
COM Express Computer On Module Express. A compact PC that provides
operating functions for the EGM.
Communications interface board An EGM component that allows the EGM to communicate with
external systems.
CompactFlash A portable mass storage device that contains EGM software,
including game software.
Component A part that makes up a whole. For example, the bank note acceptor
is a component of the EGM while the bank note stacker is a
component of the bank note acceptor.
Console A specially designed box unit on which the cabinet stands. The
cashbox is usually located securely within the base.
CPU Central processing unit. The component of a computer system that
has the circuitry to control the interpretation and execution of
instructions.
Credit A value in the EGM that represents the amount of money available
to the player. One unit of currency may equal more than one credit
(e.g. $1 might equal 100 credits). Prizes are shown as credits until
the player chooses to collect them.
Credit denomination The value of each credit. For example, an EGM configured for 25
cents registers four credits for each dollar received through the BNA
Credit meter The area on main the LCD screen where credits for play or collection
are indicated to the player.
Currency denomination The amount of money that a bank note is worth (e.g. $1, $5, etc.).
Cursor The symbol on a display indicating where the next character will
appear or where the next action will take place.
DIP switch Dual in-line package switch. A set of switches mounted on circuit
boards.
Double up A secondary game in which a player may wager part or all of the
winnings from the most recent game to double them.
Drop The process of removing bank notes from an EGM.
EEPROM Electronically erasable programmable read only memory. An
integrated memory circuit on which data can be stored, electronically
erased and rewritten.
EGM Electronic gaming machine. A device that allows game play.
Electromechanical meters Lifetime counters within the EGM that record accounting and
security information. Usage varies with jurisdiction and configuration.
These meters cannot be reset and are cumulative for the life of the
EGM.
Electronic meters Software counters within the EGM that record audit information.
Data recorded in these meters is stored in an electronic format and
can be reset.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility. The level of emissions that are
produced and can be accepted by a device.
EMI Electromagnetic interference. Noise in a transmission line that
affects the operation of electronic devices.
EPROM Electromagnetic interference. Noise in a transmission line that
affects the operation of electronic devices.
G-2
Error message A message that reports device malfunctions in the EGM.

ESD Electrostatic discharge. A build up and release of static electricity
that can harm electronic equipment.
Fault finding The process of systematically locating and eliminating the source of
a malfunction.
Firmware Software stored in an integrated circuit.
FPGA Field programmable gate array. A device that consists of
programmable logic components.
Game A program designed to operate on an EGM that offers a player the
opportunity to win money by wagering on the outcome of the game’s
activity. There can be several games on one EGM.
GAT Game authentication terminal. An interface for verifying of the
contents of the EGM’s storage media.
GDS Gaming device standard. A communications protocol used to link
peripheral devices to EGM’s.
Gen7 The version of the electronics used in the EGM.
GMCH Graphics and memory controller hub. A component used in the Intel
chipset for controlling graphics.
Handpay A book payment made for any amount in excess of the cancel credit
limit of the EGM.
HDD Hard disk drive. A magnetic device used store large amounts of
data.
Head system A system that monitors and controls two or more EGMs.
Hopper A device that holds coins that have been inserted into the EGM.
Host A computer system in which networked EGMs are the target
systems.
House The club, casino or organisation that is running the games.
I/O Input/output. Data moving between components.
Installation The process of bringing an EGM or component into operating status.
Jackpot lockup A game state that requires intervention by an attendant because the
current win exceeds the setting at win lockup or the current credits
exceed the setting at credit collect lockup upon cash out.
JPC Jackpot controller. A device that communicates to the EGM when a
jackpot is to be won.
Jumper A removable connector (plug, wire, etc.) that electrically joins
separate connections.
Jurisdiction An area under the influence of a gaming control agency that has the
rights and power to interpret and apply the law as it applies to
gaming.
LAN Local area network. A group of interconnected computers covering a
relatively limited geographic area, such as one or more buildings at
one location.
LCD Liquid crystal display. A screen that uses liquid crystals, electricity
and a light source to show images.
LED Light emitting diode. A semiconductor that glows when supplied with
a current.
Light pipe A sensor that detects a beam of light directed into it. Used to
determine if the doors are open or closed.
G-3
Light tower The multi-lamp assembly mounted at the top of the EGM that
displays EGM states and game conditions using combinations of
steady and flashing lamps.
Lockup A state that renders the EGM unplayable and is triggered by a
malfunction, a jackpot win (if the program permits) or a player
collecting a win when the credit amount is higher than the cancel
credit amount.
Logic cage A secure cage containing the printed circuit board and other
sensitive equipment.
Loom A connector that attaches a group of cables to a component using a
plastic harness.
Lower main door A door that provides access to components including the bank note
acceptor, ticket printer, coin validator and hopper.
Mass storage device A module that can store large amounts of data that is not erased
when powered down. Examples of mass storage devices include
hard drive disks and CompactFlash cards.
Meter/audit key switch A switch activated by a key that is used to turn on meter illumination
light and switch the EGM from play mode to audit mode.
Meters Devices that record and display important audit information for the
operator.
Microprocessor The component of a computer system that has the circuitry to control
the interpretation and execution of instructions.
Mid trim The part of the EGM cabinet to which playbuttons and peripheral
bezels are mounted.
Module A component of the EGM that performs a specific function.
OEM Original equipment manufacturer. Hardware made by third parties
and used by Aristocrat in EGMs (e.g. bank note acceptors, ticket
printers, etc.).
Operator Any person, partnership, company or corporation who owns,
operates, services, maintains and derives profit from their
association with gaming equipment.
Operator mode menu A display that provides access to electronic accounting information,
diagnostic functions and game configuration options.
Opto Abbreviation for optical. Used to refer to optical sensors and
optointerrupters.
OSD On-screen display.
Pay panel The part of the EGM cabinet to which the coin entry, bank note entry
and printer apertures are mounted.
PCB Printed circuit board. Fibreglass on which electrical connections are
formed by a printing and etching process. Integrated circuits and
other electronic components are added, forming a functional unit.
PCBA Printed circuit board assembly.
PCI express A protocol that is used to connect card devices (such as network
cards, sound cards, etc.) to a computer motherboard.
Peripheral An intelligent device such as a touch screen, printer or BNA that is
connected to the EGM.
Play mode An EGM mode in which players can play games.
Playbutton An illuminated button on the mid-trim panel that is used in game
play.
Player A person who deposits money into an EGM to play a game.
G-4
PMM Player marketing module. A computer, software and accessories

connected to gaming devices that allow the operator to identify a
player, accumulate data and reward the player accordingly.
Poll The process of gathering meter information from each EGM and
reporting it to the host computer.
Port A connector that allows communication between a digital system
and an external device.
Print head The part of a printer that transfers ink from the cartridge to the
paper.
Progressive jackpot An additional jackpot that increments by a fixed percentage of the
EGM’s turnover and is displayed separately for the player to see.
Protocol The communication standard used by two compatible devices.
PSIM Port simulated. A connector on the SEI board that provides
communications with peripherals.
PSU Power supply unit. A device that supplies electricity in the correct
voltage to EGM components.
RAM Random access memory. Memory that can be read or written.
Replay A function that allows the operator to review past games, including
the winning combination, the amount collected, the amount wagered,
the amount won and available credits.
Reserve A playbutton on the EGM that allows a player to indicate to others
that the EGM is reserved. This reserve message remains lit for three
minutes.
Reset key A key switch that resets the EGM after a cashier payout or corrected
EGM fault.
ROM Read-only memory. Semiconductor memory where data has been
permanently stored.
RS232 A serial communication standard that uses signals more negative
than five volts for a high and more positive than five volts for a low.
RTC Real time clock. A device that maintains time and date information.
Rx An abbreviation for receive.
SAS Slot accounting system. A protocol that allows the EGM to
communicate with external systems.
SATA Serial advanced technology attachment. A computer bus used to
transfer data between a computer and a mass storage device.
SDVO Serial digital video out. A type of port used to send video signals
from the EGM.
SEI Subsidiary equipment interface. A module that provides
communications between the EGM and external communications
systems.
Sensor A component that converts an input signal to a quantity that is
measured and changed to a readable signal for an information
gathering system.
Seven-segment display A display comprised of seven separate LED bars that display the
digit 8 when all are active.
Site controller An external computer that controls multiple EGMs at a venue.
Smart card A card that houses a microchip and is used in Aristocrat EGMs to
verify authenticity of game software or to establish credits.
Soft count The counting of currency generated by gaming operations.
G-5
Solenoid An electromagnetic device that converts electrical energy into

mechanical energy.
SPC Serial protocol converter. A device that converts the Aristocrat EGM
serial protocol to the SAS protocol.
SPI Serial peripheral interface. The hardware/software interface that
connects the CPU to the peripheral boards.
SRAM Static random access memory. A variety of RAM that has a high
speed.
Symbols The designs on the spinning reels. Common symbols include jacks,
kings, aces, cherries and gold bars.
Ticket A printed receipt that transfers credits from one EGM to another or
can be redeemed for cash, depending on jurisdiction.
Ticket printer A device that provides printed receipts.
Ticket printer bezel The outer trim of the printer that allows tickets to be collected.
TITO Ticket in, ticket out. A system in which tickets are printed by a ticket
printer and used to establish credits by the bank note acceptor.
Topbox An enclosed area at the top of the EGM that typically contains a light
assembly and artwork or an LCD screen as well as a light tower and
other optional assemblies.
Topbox door A door that provides access to the topbox LCD screen or artwork
panel, the speakers and the player marketing module.
Topper A unit that sits on top of the topbox and displays artwork to attract
players.
Touch screen A device that allows players to make selections by touching the LCD
screen.
Transport The part of the bank note acceptor that moves the bank note to the
bank note stacker.
Troubleshooting The process of systematically locating and eliminating the source of
a malfunction.
TTL Transistor-transistor logic. The ability of a circuit to be directly
connected to digital equipment.
Tx An abbreviation for transmit.
UART Universal asynchronous receiver transmitter. An integrated circuit
used in serial communication.
UPS Uninterruptible power source. A local backup power source for short
term electrical power if the primary power fails.
VACS Valid advanced coin signal. A signal sent by the coin validator to
indicate to the coin acceptor solenoid that a coin is valid.
Upper main door A door that provides access to the logic cage, backplane board and
LCD screen.
Yoyo An error that occurs when a coin moves backwards through the coin
entry system.
G-6
Service Manual Index
Index
Bill Acceptor
A
Abloy Locks..................................................... 4-14 Jams ........................................................... 8-9
Accounting Information ................................. 3-101 TITO............................................................ 8-7
Accounting Information Menu ......................... 3-28 Bill Acceptor CRC Seed Setup ....................... 3-67
Adjusting Volume .......................... 3-54, 3-64, 3-90 Bill Acceptor Information ................................. 3-35
AFT Logs ............................................. 3-47, 3-130 Bill Acceptor Log .................................. 3-41, 3-123
Amplifier Removal and Replacement .............. 4-40 Bill Acceptor Test ................................. 3-56, 3-140
Attract Mode...................................................... 3-8 BIOS ............................................................... 11-7
Attract Mode Setup ................................ 3-64, 3-90 Blanking Panel, Coin Tray .............................. 4-23
Audio System .................................................. 4-39 Blanking Plates, Pay Panel ............................. 4-22
Audit Mode ............................................. 3-24, 3-78 Block Diagram
Defined ........................................................ 3-4 Carrier Board, Issue B .............................. 11-7
Hyperlink Jackpot ...................................... 15-4

B
BACC CRC Seed Setup.................................. 3-67 Mystery Jackpot ................ 15-11, 15-12, 15-18
BACC CRC Setup ......................................... 3-147 SPC2 ........................................................ 17-5
BACC Signature Log ............................ 3-40, 3-122 SPC2.5 ................................................... 17-12
Backplane Board Standalone Jackpots ................................. 14-3
Component Locations ............................... 12-5 BNA .................................................................. 8-1
Connectors ................................................ 12-6 Cage ......................................................... 4-41
Overview ................................................... 12-3 Calibration ................................. 8-9, 8-14, 8-18
Removal and Replacement .............. 4-17, 12-9 CashCode ................................................. 8-14
Technical Description ................................ 12-4 Cleaning .................................................... 8-19
Bank Note Acceptor ................ See BNA, See BNA Jams ................................................ 8-14, 8-18
Basic Operation JCM ............................................................ 8-3
Condor Coin Validator ................................. 6-4 Maintenance ............................................. 8-19
Microcoin QL Coin Validator ........................ 6-5 MEI Cashflow ............................................ 8-11
Basic Operation, PSU ....................................... 5-6 Overview ..................................................... 8-3
Battery Backup................................................ 11-9 Removal and Replacement ....................... 8-19
Belly Door ......................................................... 4-6 Security ............................ 3-10, 8-6, 8-12, 8-16
Latches ...................................................... 4-11 Bonus Log ........................................... 3-43, 3-125
Bet Meter .......................................................... 3-6 Button Test .......................................... 3-52, 3-136
Bet/Line and Variation Settings ....................... 3-65 Buttons - Lamp Test ....................................... 3-50
Bet/Line Variation Settings .............................. 3-91
I-1
Index Service Manual
Changing Playbutton LEDs ............................. 4-21

C
Cabinet ............................................................. 4-1 Checking Printer Function ............................... 9-19
Doors .......................................................... 4-5 Chop Topbox ................................................... 4-33
Keys ............................................................ 1-8 Artwork Removal and Replacement .......... 4-34
Maintenance ............................................. 4-43 LED Removal and Replacement................ 4-33
Security ..................................................... 4-15 Chute, Cashbox............................................... 4-24
Cage, BNA...................................................... 4-41 Cleaning
Calibrate Touch Screen ....................... 3-73, 3-151 BNA ........................................................... 8-19
Calibration Hopper ......................................................... 7-9
CashCode BNA......................................... 8-18 Ithaca Epic 950 Printer .............................. 9-11
JCM UBA BNA ............................................ 8-9 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-16
MEI Cashflow BNA ................................... 8-14 Cleaning Print Head ........................................ 9-19
Canceling Credit - Operator Initiated ... 3-69, 3-149 Coin Chute Assembly, Maintenance ................. 6-7
Cancelling Credit .............................................. 3-8 Coin Chute Module.......................................... 4-18
Carrier Board Coin Entry Test ....................................3-51, 3-136
Assembly .................................................. 11-4 Coin Handling Assembly ................................... 6-1
Block Diagram, Issue B ............................. 11-7 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .. 6-6
COM Express Module ............................... 11-5 Maintenance ................................................ 6-6
Connectors.............................................. 11-14 Overview...................................................... 6-3
Diagram, Issue B ...................................... 11-6 Security........................................................ 3-9
Maintenance ........................................... 11-16 Coin Tray......................................................... 4-23
Mass Storage Devices ............................ 11-12 Coin Tray Blanking Panel ................................ 4-23
POST Code Display ................................ 11-11 Coin Validator
Power ...................................................... 11-11 Condor ......................................................... 6-3
Serial Ports ............................................... 11-8 Maintenance ................................................ 6-6
Status Indicator Lights ............................ 11-11 Microcoin QL ............................................... 6-5
Cash Information ................................. 3-34, 3-105 Removal and Replacement ......................... 6-7
Cashbox Chute ............................................... 4-24 Test ........................................................... 3-51
CashCode BNA .............................................. 8-14 COM Express Module ..................................... 11-5
Calibration ................................................. 8-18 Combination Test .................................3-55, 3-139
Jams ......................................................... 8-18 Combined Logs ....................................3-46, 3-129
Maintenance ............................................. 8-18 Commissioning the EGM................................. 2-12
Security ..................................................... 8-16 Communications Interface Board .................... 16-1
Casino Top .............................................. 1-7, 4-31 Communications Setup, PMM ......................... 4-27
ccTalk Interface .............................................. 11-9 CompactFlash ............................................... 11-12
CF............................................ See CompactFlash Inserting ..................................................... 3-15
Changing Playbutton Labels ........................... 4-20 Component Locations, Backplane Board ........ 12-5
I-2
Condor Coin Validator ....................................... 6-3 Lock Removal and Replacement .............. 4-13
Configuration Information Voucher ................. 3-72 Security ............................................ 3-11, 4-15
Configuring the EGM ............................. 2-11, 3-60 Doors Log ............................................ 3-44, 3-126
Configuring with the SetChip Program ............ 3-16

E
Connectors EFT In Log ........................................... 3-42, 3-124
Backplane Board ....................................... 12-6 EFT Out Log ........................................ 3-43, 3-125
Carrier Board ........................................... 11-14 EGM
Electromechanical Meters ......................... 13-5 Clearances .................................................. 2-7
Ethernet ..................................................... 11-7 Commissioning ......................................... 2-12
GAT Port ................................................... 11-8 Configuration.................................... 3-16, 3-60
Hopper ........................................................ 7-7 Configuring................................................ 2-11
PSU ........................................................... 5-14 Doors .......................................................... 4-5
Serial Ports ................................................ 11-8 Footprint ...................................................... 2-6
SPC2 ......................................................... 17-7 Functional Description................................. 1-9
SPC2 DC Converter Board........................ 17-9 Installation ................................................... 2-8
SPC2.5 .................................................... 17-13 Keys ............................................................ 1-8
USB ........................................................... 11-9 Physical Description .................................... 1-3
Credit Meter ...................................................... 3-6 Specifications ............................................ 1-10
Current Active Lockups ................................... 3-77 Startup Sequence ..................................... 3-16
Current Credit ............................................... 3-101 Electromechanical Meter Board ...................... 13-1
Current Credit Types ....................................... 3-30 Electromechanical Meters ..................... 3-14, 4-29
Current Lockup ............................................. 3-157 Board ........................................................ 13-5
Current Meters ..................................... 3-29, 3-110 Maintenance ............................................. 13-6
Options ..................................................... 3-66

D
DC Converter Board, SPC2 ............................ 17-9 Overview ................................................... 13-3
Diagnostic Information Menu .......................... 3-38 Removal and Replacement ....................... 13-6
Diagnostics Information................................. 3-120 Electronic Meters ............................................ 3-14
Disable Secure Enhanced Validation ... 3-70, 3-150 Fault Finding ........................................... 18-13
Disassembly and Assembly Enable/Disable Help Screen ................ 3-75, 3-154
Light Tower................................................ 4-38 Error Log.............................................. 3-39, 3-121
Logic Cage ................................................ 4-17 Ethernet .......................................................... 11-7
Display PSD Signature......................... 3-48, 3-133

F
Door Sensor Removal and Replacement ........ 4-15 Factory Test......................................... 3-54, 3-138
Door Switch Removal and Replacement ......... 4-15 Fault Finding ................................................... 18-1
Doors ................................................................ 4-5 Electronic Meters .................................... 18-13
Hinges ....................................................... 4-10 Feature Topbox Lighting ........................... 18-5
Latches ...................................................... 4-11 Hopper ...................................................... 18-9
I-3
Ithaca Epic 950 Printer .............................. 9-12 Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ................................ 9-7
Lamps and LEDS ...................................... 18-4 LCD Screens ............................................. 10-3
Main LCD Screen.................................... 18-12 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-14
Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-18 PMM .......................................................... 4-26
Ticket Printer ........................................... 18-11 General Log .........................................3-46, 3-128
Topbox LCD Screen ............................... 18-13 Graphics Card ............................................... 11-13
Fault State ...................................................... 3-12

H
Feature Statistics ................................. 3-31, 3-117 Handling the Touch Screen ........................... 10-11
Feature Topbox - Fault Finding ...................... 18-5 Handpays State ............................................... 3-12
Feature Topbox LCD Screen .......................... 10-6 Hard Disk Drive ............................................. 11-13
Feature Topbox Lights Test ............................ 3-51 HDD .............................................................. 11-13
Flash Card ............................... See CompactFlash Hinges ............................................................. 4-10
Force Game End ................................. 3-69, 3-150 Hopper .............................................................. 7-1
Functional Description Coin Counting .............................................. 7-7
EGM............................................................ 1-9 Fault Finding .............................................. 18-9
Main Logic Assembly ................................ 11-4 Maintenance ................................................ 7-8
Fuses, Removal and Replacement ................. 5-16 Motor Control ............................................... 7-6
FutureLogic Printer ........................................... 9-3 Security...................................................... 3-10
Removal and Replacement ......................... 9-6 Hopper Collect Limit .......................................... 3-7
Specifications .............................................. 9-4 Hopper Test .........................................3-52, 3-137
Ticket Handling ........................................... 9-5 Hyperlink Combination Test .................3-57, 3-141
Hyperlink Jackpot ............................................ 15-1

G
Gamble Statistics................................. 3-31, 3-109 Block Diagram ........................................... 15-4
Game Display ................................................... 3-6

I
Game Machine Options .................................. 3-61 Idle State ......................................................... 3-12
Game Meters .................................................... 3-6 Input Functional Specifications, PSU ................ 5-7
Game Operation ............................................... 3-5 Inserting CompactFlash Card .......................... 3-15
Game Play ........................................................ 3-7 Inserting Smart Card ....................................... 3-15
Game Replay....................................... 3-30, 3-108 Installation, EGM ............................................... 2-8
Game Statistics ................................... 3-32, 3-117 Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ...................................... 9-7
GAMMA Menu ................................................ 3-57 Cleaning .................................................... 9-11
Gamma Protocol........................................... 3-142 Fault Finding .............................................. 9-12
GAT Port ........................................................ 11-8 Removal and Replacement ....................... 9-11
General Description .......................................... 1-1 Sensors ..................................................... 9-10
Cabinet ....................................................... 4-4 Specifications .............................................. 9-8
Feature Topbox LCD Screen .................... 10-6 Ticket Handling ............................................ 9-9
FutureLogic Printer ..................................... 9-3
I-4
J M
Jams Machine Fault Finding .................................... 18-1
CashCode BNA ......................................... 8-18 Machine Identification ............................ 3-27, 3-83
MEI Cashflow BNA .................................... 8-14 Machine Modes ................................................ 3-1
Jams, Bill Acceptor ........................................... 8-9 Machine Options ............................................. 3-83
JCM UBA BNA .................................................. 8-3 Main LCD Screen .................................... 3-8, 4-24
Calibration ................................................... 8-9 Fault Finding ........................................... 18-12
Maintenance ................................................ 8-8 Main Logic Assembly ...................................... 11-1
Security ....................................................... 8-6 Carrier Board ............................................ 11-4
Jurisdictional Settings ............................ 3-62, 3-88 Maintenance ........................................... 11-16
Overview ................................................... 11-3

K
Key Switches .................................................. 4-13 Maintenance
Keys .................................................................. 1-8 Backplane Board ....................................... 12-9
BNA .......................................................... 8-19

L
Lamp Test ............................................ 3-50, 3-134 BNA Cage ................................................. 4-41
Lamps and LEDs, Fault Finding ...................... 18-4 Cabinet...................................................... 4-43
Latches, Door.................................................. 4-11 Carrier Board .......................................... 11-16
LCD Screens................................................... 10-1 CashCode BNA ......................................... 8-18
Fault Finding............................................ 18-12 Coin Handling Assembly ............................. 6-6
Main ................................................... 3-8, 4-24 Communications Interface Board .............. 16-4
OSD .......................................................... 10-8 Diverter Solenoid ........................................ 6-7
Specifications ............................................ 10-4 Electromechanical Meters ......................... 13-6
Test ........................................................... 3-53 Hopper ........................................................ 7-8
Topbox ...................................................... 4-31 JCM UBA BNA ............................................ 8-8
Touch Screen ............................................ 10-9 MEI Cashflow BNA.................................... 8-14
LED Operations PSU .......................................................... 5-16
SPC2 ......................................................... 17-4 Screens ................................................... 10-11
SPC2.5 .................................................... 17-11 SPC ........................................................ 17-14
Light Tower ............................................ 3-12, 4-37 Ticket Printer ............................................. 9-19

Liquid Crystal Displays .................. See LCD Screens Topper ...................................................... 4-35
Location Name Setup ..................................... 3-89 Market Specific Options .................................. 3-66
Location Setup ................................................ 3-63 Mechanical Meters Options ............................ 3-66
Locks, Removal and Replacement ................. 4-13 Mechanical Reel Test .......................... 3-55, 3-145
Lockup Messages ....................... 3-77, 3-157, 18-4 Media Display Content Log ........................... 3-133
Logic Cage ...................................................... 4-16 Medium Capacity Cyclone Hopper ................... 7-4
Logs ................................................................ 3-39 MEI Cashflow BNA ......................................... 8-11
Lower Main Door ............................................... 4-5 Calibration ................................................. 8-14
Latches ...................................................... 4-11 Jams ......................................................... 8-14
I-5
Maintenance ............................................. 8-14

N
Security ..................................................... 8-12 Nanoptix Paycheck Printer .............................. 9-14
Menus Fault Finding .............................................. 9-18
Accounting Information ............................. 3-28 Ticket Handling .......................................... 9-15
Current Active Lockups ............................. 3-77 Network Diagnostics ...................................... 3-144
Current Lockup ....................................... 3-157

O
Diagnostic Information .............................. 3-38 On Screen Display ....................................See OSD
GAMMA .................................................... 3-57 Operating Environment
Miscellaneous ........................................... 3-67 EGM .......................................................... 1-11
Operator Mode ................................. 3-24, 3-78 PSU ........................................................... 5-15
Operator Setup/Selections ........................ 3-60 Operation of Touch Screen ........................... 10-10
Test/Diagnostics Mode ............................. 3-49 Operator Force Game End ............................ 3-150
Messages Operator Force Game End Request................ 3-69
Game .......................................................... 3-6 Operator Initiated Cancel Credit .................... 3-149
Lockup ........................................... 3-77, 3-157 Operator Initiated Cancel Credit Request ........ 3-69
Meter Window Error Recovery ............. 3-76, 3-154 Operator Mode Menu .............................3-24, 3-78
Meter/Audit Key ................................................ 1-8 Operator Setup/Selections .............................. 3-83
Meters Operator Setup/Selections Menu .................... 3-60
Display .................................. 3-29, 3-39, 3-121 OSD ................................................................ 10-8
Electromechanical ..................................... 3-14 Out of Service ......................................3-68, 3-149
Electronic .................................................. 3-14 Output Functional Specifications, PSU.............. 5-8
Game .......................................................... 3-6 Output Protection, PSU ................................... 5-13
Options ..................................................... 3-66 Outputs.............................................................. 5-8
Microcoin QL Coin Validator ............................. 6-5 Overview
Mid Trim ......................................................... 4-19 Backplane Board ....................................... 12-3
Miscellaneous ............................................... 3-147 BNA ............................................................. 8-3
Miscellaneous Menu ....................................... 3-67 Communications Interface Board .............. 16-3
Monitor Test......................................... 3-53, 3-137 Electromechanical Meters ......................... 13-3
Mult-Game Accounting ................................... 3-36 Hopper ......................................................... 7-3
Multi-Denomination Accounting ........... 3-37, 3-103 Hyperlink and Mystery Jackpots ................ 15-3
Multi-Game Accounting ................................ 3-102 LCD Screens ............................................. 10-3
Multiplied Jackpot Log .................................... 3-44 Main Logic Assembly ................................. 11-3
Multiplier Log ................................................ 3-126 PSU ............................................................. 5-3
Mystery Jackpot .............................................. 15-1 SPC ........................................................... 17-3
Block Diagram................... 15-11, 15-12, 15-18 Standalone Jackpots ................................. 14-3
Ticket Printer ............................................... 9-3
I-6
P PSU
Package Log ................................................. 3-131
Basic Operation .......................................... 5-6
Package Success Log .................................. 3-132
Connectors................................................ 5-14
Panic Log ............................................. 3-40, 3-122
Input Functional Specifications ................... 5-7
Pay Panel........................................................ 4-22
Operating Environment ............................. 5-15
Periodic Meters .................................... 3-29, 3-114
Output Functional Specifications ................. 5-8
Peripheral Information Voucher ...................... 3-72
Output Protection ...................................... 5-13
Photo-Optic Sensor, Maintenance .................... 6-7
Overview ..................................................... 5-3
Physical Description
Removal and Replacement ....................... 5-17
Backplane Board ....................................... 12-3
R
CashCode BNA ......................................... 8-14
RAM Clearing
EGM ............................................................ 1-3
SPC2 ........................................................ 17-5
JCM UBA BNA ............................................ 8-3
SPC2.5 ................................................... 17-11
Main Logic Assembly ................................ 11-3
Real Time Clock Setup .......................... 3-63, 3-89
MEI Cashflow BNA .................................... 8-11
Reel LED Test .............................................. 3-146
Play Mode ......................................................... 3-4
Reel Shutter Test .......................................... 3-145
Playbuttons ................................................ 3-7, 3-8
Removal and Replacement
Player Marketing Module ....................... See PMM
Backplane Board ....................................... 12-9
PMM ............................................................... 4-25
Belly Door ................................................... 4-7
Communications Setup ............................. 4-27
BNA .......................................................... 8-19
Removal and Replacement ....................... 4-28
Button LEDs .............................................. 4-21
POST Code Display ...................................... 11-11
Cashbox Chute ......................................... 4-24
Power Inputs ..................................................... 5-7
Casino Topbox .......................................... 4-32
Power Log ............................................ 3-45, 3-127
Casino Topbox LCD Screen ..................... 4-32
Power Outputs .................................................. 5-8
Chop Topbox ............................................ 4-33
Power Supply .......................................... See PSU
Chop Topbox Artwork ............................... 4-34
Power, Carrier Board .................................... 11-11
Chop Topbox LED .................................... 4-33
Pre-Installation Requirements ........................... 2-3
Coin Ejector Fingers ................................... 7-8
Primary Accounting Meters Voucher ............... 3-71
Coin Validator ............................................. 6-7
Print Audit Vouchers ....................................... 3-70
Communications Interface Board .............. 16-4
Print Head, Cleaning ....................................... 9-19
Diverter Solenoid ........................................ 6-7
Printer ......... See Ticket Printer, See Ticket Printer
Door Latches............................................. 4-11
Printer CRC Seed Setup ...................... 3-68, 3-148
Door Switch ............................................... 4-15
Printer Signature Log ........................... 3-45, 3-127
Electromechanical Meters ......................... 13-6
Printer Test .......................................... 3-56, 3-140
Fuses ........................................................ 5-16
Progressive and Game Play Meters Voucher . 3-71
FutureLogic Printer ..................................... 9-6
Progressive Controller Setup Voucher ............ 3-73
Hopper ........................................................ 7-8
Progressive Level Setup ........................ 3-62, 3-88
I-7
Ithaca Epic 950 Printer .............................. 9-11 JCM UBA BNA ............................................ 8-6
JCM Bill Acceptor Transport ....................... 8-8 MEI Cashflow BNA .................................... 8-12
JCM UBA Bill Acceptor Drop Box ............... 8-8 Security Meters ....................................3-39, 3-121
Key Switches ............................................ 4-13 Self-Test ............................................................ 3-9
Light Tower ............................................... 4-38 Sensors, Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ..................... 9-10
Locks ........................................................ 4-13 Serial Peripheral Interface ............................. 11-10
Logic Cage and Backplane Board ............. 4-17 Serial Protocol Converter ........................ See SPC
Lower Main Door ......................................... 4-5 Service State ................................................... 3-12
Main LCD Screen...................................... 4-24 SetChip Program ............................................. 3-16
Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-17 Setting the Location Name .............................. 3-63
Optical Door Sensor .................................. 4-15 Setting the Time .............................................. 3-63
Pay Panel.................................................. 4-22 Smart Card .................................................... 11-13
PMM ......................................................... 4-28 Inserting ..................................................... 3-15
PSU .......................................................... 5-17 Smartcard Information ..........................3-47, 3-132
Sound System........................................... 4-40 Solid State Drive ........................................... 11-13
SPC ........................................................ 17-14 Sound ................................................................ 3-8
Topbox Door ............................................. 4-30 Volume ................................... 3-54, 3-64, 3-90
Topper ...................................................... 4-35 Sound Effects Tests ...................................... 3-138
Topper Fuse ............................................. 4-35 Sound System ................................................. 4-39
Upper Main Door......................................... 4-6 Sound System Setup..............................3-64, 3-90
Removing Excess Dust from Printer ............... 9-19 Sound System Tests ....................................... 3-54
Replay of Previous Games .................. 3-30, 3-108 SPC
Reset Key ......................................................... 1-8 Overview.................................................... 17-3
Reset Messages ........................................... 18-14 Removal and Replacement ..................... 17-14
Reset Procedure ............................................. 3-15 SPC Configuration........................................... 3-91
Restart Procedure .......................................... 3-15 SPC Configuration Screen .............................. 3-65
SPC2 ............................................................... 17-3

S
Screens - Maintenance ................................. 10-11 Connectors ................................................ 17-7
Script Log ..................................................... 3-131 DC Converter Board .................................. 17-9
Security LED Operations ......................................... 17-4
BNA .......................................................... 3-10 Maintenance ............................................ 17-14
Cabinet ..................................................... 4-15 RAM Clearing ............................................ 17-5
CashCode BNA......................................... 8-16 SPC2.5 .......................................................... 17-10
Coin Handling Assembly ............................. 3-9 Connectors .............................................. 17-13
Doors ........................................................ 3-11 LED Operations ....................................... 17-11
Electromechanical Meters ......................... 13-5 Maintenance ............................................ 17-14
Hopper ...................................................... 3-10 RAM Clearing .......................................... 17-11
I-8
Speakers ......................................................... 4-39 Maintenance ............................................. 9-19
Specifications Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-14
EGM .......................................................... 1-10 Removal and Replacement ................ 9-6, 9-11
Feature Topbox LCD Screen..................... 10-6 Ticket/Voucher Out Log ....................... 3-42, 3-124
FutureLogic Printer ...................................... 9-4 Tilt State ......................................................... 3-12
Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ................................ 9-8 TITO ................................................................. 8-7
LCD Screens ............................................. 10-4 Topbox............................................................ 4-30
Touch Screen ............................................ 10-9 Chop ......................................................... 4-33
Specifying Light Tower Tiers ........................... 3-13 Door Removal and Replacement .............. 4-30
SSD .............................................................. 11-13 Topbox LCD Screen ....................................... 4-31
Standalone Jackpots ....................................... 14-1 Topbox LCD Screen, Fault Finding.............. 18-13
Standard Lamp Test ....................................... 3-50 Topper ................................... 1-7, 4-31, 4-34, 4-36
Start, Reset and Restart Procedure ................ 3-15 Topper Fuse, Removal and Replacement ...... 4-35
Startup Sequence ........................................... 3-16 Topper Removal and Replacement ................ 4-35
Status Indicator Lights, Carrier Board ........... 11-11 Touch Screen ............................. 3-73, 3-151, 10-9
Storage Devices............................................ 11-12 Handling .................................................. 10-11
Sub Denom Information .................................. 3-37 Operation ................................................ 10-10
Sub Game Information .................................... 3-36

U
Suit Gamble Statistics ..................................... 3-31 Upper Main Door .............................................. 4-6
Switches, Key ................................................. 4-13 Latches ..................................................... 4-11
System Memory Usage ........................ 3-76, 3-155 USB ................................................................ 11-9
USB Stick Storage Device ............................ 11-13

T
Technical Description
V
Backplane Board ....................................... 12-4 Video Graphics ............................................. 11-13
PMM .......................................................... 4-26 Video Monitor Test Menu................................ 3-53
Test/Diagnostics Mode ................................. 3-134 Volume Adjustment....................... 3-54, 3-64, 3-90
Test/Diagnostics Mode Menu.......................... 3-49 Voucher In Log .................................... 3-41, 3-123
Ticket Handling Voucher In, Voucher Out .................................. 8-7
FutureLogic Printer ...................................... 9-5 Voucher Printer
Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ................................ 9-9 Test ........................................................... 3-56
Nanoptix Paycheck Printer ........................ 9-15 Vouchers In Meters ........................................ 3-35
Ticket In, Ticket Out (TITO) .............................. 9-3 Vouchers Out Meters ...................................... 3-36
Ticket Printer ..................................................... 3-7

W
Fault Finding.......................... 9-12, 9-18, 18-11 WAT Logs ..................................................... 3-130
FutureLogic Printer ...................................... 9-3 Win Meter ......................................................... 3-6
Ithaca Epic 950 Printer ................................ 9-7 Woofer Removal and Replacement ................ 4-40
I-9
Notes
I-10

EUR ViridianWS Service (AM-0206-04)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EUR ViridianWS Service (AM-0206-04)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EUR ViridianWS Service (AM-0206-04)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VIRIDIAN WS™

© Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 2011

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

Important Safety Information

Inform Yourself and Your Staff

Manuals and Part Catalogues

The Operator Manual:

 Gives a general overview of the hardware and software.

The Service Manual:

 Gives a general overview of the hardware and software.

The Parts Catalogue:

 Shows illustrations of each of the components of the EGM.

01 Feb 2011 Original issue for submission. AU TechDocs

02 Jul 2011 Original issue. AU TechDocs

03 Jul 2011 General updates. AU TechDocs

04 Oct 2011 Periodic update. AU TechDocs

Brief History of Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd

1.2 Functional Description ............................................................................ 1-9

1.3 Specifications......................................................................................... 1-10

Installation ...................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 2-8

2.2.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up .................................................... 2-10

2.2.3 Configuring the EGM ............................................................................................ 2-11

2.2.4 Commissioning the EGM ..................................................................................... 2-12

Machine Modes .............................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Play Mode ................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.2 Main LCD Screen ................................................................................................... 3-8

3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes ................................................................................................. 3-8

3.2.4 Playbuttons ............................................................................................................. 3-8

3.2.5 EGM Self-Test ........................................................................................................ 3-9

3.2.6 Security .................................................................................................................. 3-9

3.2.7 Light Tower........................................................................................................... 3-12

3.2.8 Electromechanical Meters .................................................................................... 3-14

3.2.9 Electronic Meters.................................................................................................. 3-14

3.2.10 Start, Reset and Restart Procedure ..................................................................... 3-15

3.3 Operator Mode Menu .............................................................................3-24

3.3.2 Accounting Information......................................................................................... 3-28

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu ............................................................................... 3-38

3.3.4 Test/Diagnostics Mode ......................................................................................... 3-49

3.3.5 Operator Setup/Selections Menu ......................................................................... 3-60

3.3.6 Miscellaneous Menu............................................................................................. 3-67

3.3.7 Current Active Lockups ........................................................................................ 3-77

3.4 Operator Mode Menu – Worldbase .......................................................3-78

3.4.2 Operator Setup/Selections ................................................................................... 3-83

3.4.3 Accounting Information....................................................................................... 3-101

3.4.4 Diagnostics Information ...................................................................................... 3-120

3.4.5 Test/Diagnostics Mode ....................................................................................... 3-134

3.4.6 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................... 3-147

3.4.7 Current Lockup ................................................................................................... 3-157

Cabinet ............................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 Cabinet and Doors ...................................................................................4-5

4.2.2 Upper Main Door .................................................................................................... 4-6

4.2.3 Belly Door ............................................................................................................... 4-6

4.2.4 Hinges .................................................................................................................. 4-10

4.2.5 Door Latches and Keys ........................................................................................ 4-11

4.2.6 Key Switches ........................................................................................................ 4-13

4.2.7 Cabinet Security ................................................................................................... 4-15

4.2.8 Logic Cage ........................................................................................................... 4-16